JP7001003B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device (for example). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

The invention according to claim 1 is an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry means in order to solve the above problems.
An acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and an acquisition information storage means.
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. The grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination and
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination.
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated in a state where the operation result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is notified, which is regarded as one game round, and the game round is used in each game round. A game time control means that allows the movement to be performed, and
A special unit display control means for displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a special unit display control means.
In a situation where the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the said special information corresponding to the special information before the game round triggered by the special information is started. A specific display control means in which the display mode of the special unit display is a specific display mode so that the player can recognize that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information.
After the privilege is granted, the probability of granting the privilege is set to a higher probability state than in the case of the low probability state, and the specified number of game times after the privilege is granted is in the high probability state. The means to get it done,
Equipped with
In the specific display control means, a plurality of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means in a situation where the special unit display in the specific display mode does not exist. In such a situation, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the front side in the order of starting the game round among the plurality of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is specified. A means is provided for making the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the rear side in the order of starting the game round as the specific display mode, while not using the display mode .
As the starting ball entering means, a predetermined starting ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state is provided.
The gaming machine includes a switching control means for switching and controlling the predetermined starting and entering means between the open state and the closed state.
The switching control means has a first mode and a second mode in which the open state is more likely to occur than the first mode as the control mode of the predetermined start / entry means.
This gaming machine is
The privilege depends on whether the special information that triggered the grant of the privilege is the first grant correspondence information in the grant correspondence information or the special information is the second grant correspondence information in the grant correspondence information. The means for differentiating the number of times of the game in which the second mode is maintained after being granted
When the grant of the privilege is completed and the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means, the second mode is maintained after the privilege is granted. A means for controlling so that a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of times of the game is executed, and
When the granting of the privilege is completed and the special information corresponding to the granting information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the means for controlling the predetermined notification is not executed. ,
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of a pachinko machine by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the type table for 1st special drawing, and (b) it is explanatory drawing for explaining the type table for 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the destination identification process in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the holding area on the production side. It is a flowchart which shows the reception process of the hold command in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specifying process of the display continuation period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure determination in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric termination processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process for a game round in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process in a sound light side MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the hold effect executed in the hold display area of the symbol display device, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the hold unit image in the hold effect. be. (A)-(h) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the display change effect is executed. (A)-(h) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the display change effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the hold effect in the sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various lottery tables relating to a hold effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the execution lottery table of a display change effect. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the display change effect in a sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the scenario data group stored in advance in the sound light side ROM. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the scenario data included in the scenario data group for 5 pieces. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the scenario lottery table in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the storage process of the scenario data in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start process of the display change effect in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for changing a scenario in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for display change effect in a sound light side MPU. (A) to (f) are time charts showing how the display change effect is executed. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the first ending image, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second ending image, and (c) explaining the contents of the third ending image. It is explanatory drawing for. (A)-(h) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state that the villa confirmation effect is executed. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state that the villa confirmation effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the final effect in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the ending effect in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the display change effect executed by the sound light side MPU in the 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(h) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the continuous villa confirmation effect in 3rd Embodiment is executed. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state that the villa confirmation effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the final effect in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process in a sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol determination process which is executed in the sound light side MPU in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration for the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as to be in a locked state. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. As a guide rail is configured. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail.

By the way, the game ball launch mechanism 27 has a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying the game ball stored in the precision plate 55a described later on the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. It is equipped with a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. The solenoid 27c is driven and controlled by the rotation operation of the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14, and the game ball is launched.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning unit 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating device 33, a second operating device 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and a round display section 39. Etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, with respect to the general winning unit 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating device 33, and the second operating device 34, when a ball is entered, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is entered into the first operating device 33, three prize balls are paid out and the balls are entered into the second operating device 34. 1 prize ball is paid out, and when a ball is entered into the general winning unit 31, 10 prize balls are paid out and the special electric winning device 32 is entered. If so, 15 prize balls will be paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the second operating device 34 has a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating device 33, but the specific number of prize balls is different from the above. Often, the number of prize balls may be the same for the first actuating device 33 and the second actuating device 34, and the second actuating device 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first actuating device 33.

In addition, an out opening 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that has not entered various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, a large number of nails 24b are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning unit 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating device 33, the second operating device 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into a game is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 protrudes in front of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PA, the upper region PA1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PA1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and above the variable display unit 36. The left region PA2, which is the left region, the right region PA3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PA1, and the left region PA2 and the right region PA3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously partitioned below the variable display unit 36 into a lower region PA4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount, so that the game ball moves to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PA1. Start to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the left region PA2 → the lower region PA4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player operates the launch operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the player operates the launch operation device 28 on the right side of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4. That is, by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2 of the left side region PA2 and the right side region PA3, and also the right side region. The game can be performed so that the game ball flows down the PA3. By the way, when the launch operation device 28 is operated with the maximum momentum, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PA1 → the right region PA3 → the lower region PA4.

The first actuating device 33 is installed in the lower region PA4. The first actuating device 33 is open upward, and is not provided with a member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first actuating device 33. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating device 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first actuating device 33 is always capable of entering a game ball that flows down from the gaming area PA toward the first actuating device 33.

The first actuating device 33 detects a first special figure detection sensor 33a capable of detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first actuating device 33, and a game ball that has won a prize in the first actuating device 33. A second special figure detection sensor 33b capable of enabling a passage area in which a game ball winning a prize in the first operating device 33 continues to the detection range of the first special figure detection sensor 33a, and a second special figure detection sensor 33b. It is provided with a ball distribution mechanism 33c that distributes to any of the passage areas leading to the detection range of. The ball distribution mechanism 33c is provided on the upstream side of the detection range of the first special figure detection sensor 33a and the detection range of the second special figure detection sensor 33b in the flow path of the game ball winning the first operating device 33. Has been done.

The ball distribution mechanism 33c is not electrically driven, but is mechanically driven by an external force received by the game ball winning the first operating device 33 in contact with the game ball toward the detection range of the first special drawing detection sensor 33a. Is switched to either a state of deriving the game ball or a state of deriving the game ball toward the detection range of the second special figure detection sensor 33b. Specifically, when the ball distribution mechanism 33c is in the first distribution state, the ball distribution mechanism 33c is a passage leading the game ball winning in the first actuating device 33 to the detection range of the first special figure detection sensor 33a. It is led out to the area, and when it is in the second distribution state, the game ball winning the first operating device 33 is led out to the passage area leading to the detection range of the second special figure detection sensor 33b. In the situation where the ball distribution mechanism 33c is in the first distribution state, the game ball that has won a prize in the first actuating device 33 comes into contact with the ball distribution mechanism 33c, so that the game ball continues to the detection range of the first special drawing detection sensor 33a. It is led out to the aisle area and is switched from the first distribution state to the second distribution state by receiving the force of the game ball. Further, the ball distribution mechanism 33c brings the game ball into the detection range of the second special drawing detection sensor 33b when the game ball winning the prize in the first actuating device 33 comes into contact with the ball distribution mechanism 33c in the second distribution state. It is derived to the passage area following the above, and is switched from the second distribution state to the first distribution state by receiving the force of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball winning the first operating device 33 is detected by either the first special figure detection sensor 33a or the second special figure detection sensor 33b, and is detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a. The situation is basically repeated alternately with the situation detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b.

However, depending on the state of the ball distribution mechanism 33c, a plurality of game balls may be continuously derived to one of the detection range of the first special figure detection sensor 33a and the detection range of the second special figure detection sensor 33b. It can happen. Further, the switching of the operating state of the ball distribution mechanism 33c is not limited to the configuration generated by the force of the game ball, and the ball distribution mechanism is used when the game ball is detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a. The ball distribution mechanism 33c is switched to the first distribution state when the 33c is switched to the second distribution state and the ball distribution mechanism 33c is switched to the first distribution state when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 33b for the second special figure. May be configured to be electrically driven.

The first special figure detection sensor 33a and the second special figure detection sensor 33b are electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later. The main control device 60 grasps whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first operating device 33 based on the signal received from the first special drawing detection sensor 33a or the second special drawing detection sensor 33b. The game ball that has won a prize in the first operating device 33 is detected by either the first special drawing detection sensor 33a or the second special drawing detection sensor 33b, and then discharged to the back side of the game board 24.

The first actuating device 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36a formed in the variable display unit 36. Further, an introduction port 36b is provided on the left side of the variable display unit 36, and a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball entering the introduction port 36b onto the stage 36a is formed in the variable display unit 36. Has been done. The game ball that has flowed into the stage 36a through the guide passage and is discharged from the lateral central portion 36c of the stage 36a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 is likely to win a prize in the first actuating device 33. ing.

The position where the first actuating device 33 is provided in the lower region PA4 is a position where a game ball flowing down the left side region PA2 can enter, and a game ball flowing down the right side region PA3 can enter. It is in a certain position. As a result, either when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, or when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Even if there is, it is possible to win a prize in the first operating device 33. However, since the introduction port 36b that allows the game ball to flow into the stage 36a is provided only on the left side of the variable display unit 36, the launch operation device 28 operates so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2. In the case of this, the winning of the first operating device 33 is more likely to occur than in the case where the launching operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2 and the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. In any case, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating device 33 may be the same or substantially the same, and the launching operation device 28 may cause the game ball to flow down the left side region PA2. When is operated, a prize may be given to the first operating device 33, while when the launch operating device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right region PA3, the first operating device 33 is operated. It may be configured so that no prize is generated.

The second actuating device 34 is located in the right region PA3. That is, the second actuating device 34 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side region PA3. A prize can be won when the device 28 is operated. The second actuating device 34 is provided with a universal electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second actuating device 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second actuating device 34. The second operation detection sensor 34c that detects the game ball that has won the prize in the general electric drive unit 34b for opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a and the second operation device 34 are both electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later. ing. When the drive signal is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the general electric drive unit 34b, the general electric accessory 34a is opened, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the general electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. do. Further, the main control device 60 grasps whether or not the second operation device 34 has won a prize based on the detection result of the second operation detection sensor 34c.

In the right region PA3, a through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball with respect to the second actuating device 34. That is, the through gate 35 cannot win a prize when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the launch operation device 28 so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If is operated, a prize can be won. The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through the through hole, a prize is generated for the through gate 35. Therefore, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 will continue to flow down the game area PA. The through gate 35 is provided with a through detection sensor 35a, and the through detection sensor 35a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 35. The through detection sensor 35a is electrically connected to the main control device 60 described later, and the main control device 60 grasps whether or not the through gate 35 has won a prize based on the signal received from the through detection sensor 35a.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electric accessory 34a of the second operating device 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal drawing display unit of the normal drawing unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. At 38a, the display mode is switched and displayed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the normal electric power, the public electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device and the organic EL display device are not limited thereto. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix displays. In addition, the target to be switched and displayed on the general map display unit 38a is a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the normal figure reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with a prize in the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through the display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided in the lower right corner of the game area PA where the game ball does not pass. The special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a and a second special figure display unit 37b. The display area of the first special symbol display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special symbol display unit 37b is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Further, the area of the display area including the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is also smaller than the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

In the first special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed with the detection of the game ball by the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first actuating device 33 as a trigger, so that the display mode can be switched or determined. The display is done. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special figure display unit 37b, the game ball is detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33, or the game is played by the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. The winning lottery is performed with the detection of the ball as a trigger, so that the display mode is switched or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, the targets to be switched and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b include a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, and a plurality of types. A configuration in which a character is displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure hold display unit 37c and a second special figure hold display unit 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. .. In a situation where the switching display of the display mode on the first special figure display unit 37a cannot be newly started, the number of game balls detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33 is the first special figure. Up to four pieces are held as the drawing side holding information, and the number of holdings of the first special drawing side holding information is displayed by lighting the first special drawing holding display unit 37c. Further, in a situation where the switching display of the display mode on the second special figure display unit 37b cannot be newly started, the second operation detection of the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34 is performed. The number of game balls detected by the sensor 34c is held up to 4 as the second special figure side hold information, and the number of hold information of the second special figure side hold information is displayed by lighting the second special figure hold display unit 37d. It is supposed to be done.

About the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first actuating device 33, the first special figure display unit 37a displays a switching display or a predetermined display of the display mode. When this is performed, a variation display or a predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly, and the game is played by the second operation detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. When the second special figure display unit 37b performs the switching display or the predetermined display of the display mode based on the detection of the sphere, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is performed accordingly. In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning a prize in the first actuating device 33 or the second actuating device 34, but also the display effect in the open / close execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. Will be.

The display contents when the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of the symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), the symbols which are a kind of symbols are nine kinds of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" and shell-shaped symbols. It is composed of a sub-design consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1" are arranged. The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged between them, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display surface of the symbol display device 41, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are displayed. It is designed to be stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are formed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. It is set.

When the symbol variation is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 based on the winning of the first actuating device 33 or the second actuating device 34, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are predetermined with periodicity. The movement display is started so as to scroll in the direction. Then, the movement display is switched to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. In this case, the standby display means that the symbol is displayed as if it stays at a predetermined position in the scroll direction of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but the symbol is reciprocated or the size is enlarged / reduced in a direction different from the scroll direction. Is to be displayed. Further, the static display means that the symbol is displayed at a predetermined position in the scroll direction of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without changing the display mode. Further, when the symbols are statically displayed, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot result described later, the same combination of symbols is formed on any of the effective lines.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operating devices 33 and 34, the variable display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and the variable display is displayed. The period until the end is equivalent to one game. Further, the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and may be configured such that only numbers are variablely displayed as the symbol, for example.

At the bottom of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b), the number of reserved first special figure side reserved information for the first special figure display unit 37a and the second A hold display area 41a is set in which a display is performed so that the player can recognize the total number of hold pieces of the second special figure side hold information for the special figure display unit 37b. In the hold display area 41a, the number of hold unit image GRs corresponding to the total number of special figure side hold information (first special figure side hold information and second special figure side hold information) is displayed. The holding unit image GR is displayed without distinguishing whether it corresponds to the first special drawing side holding information or the second special drawing side holding information. That is, in the hold display area 41a, the total number of the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information is calculated without distinguishing between the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information. The corresponding number of hold unit images GR is displayed. The display mode (color, shape, and size) is not limited to this, and the hold unit image GR corresponding to the first special figure side hold information and the hold unit image GR corresponding to the second special figure side hold information. At least one) may be different.

Since the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces for the first special figure display unit 37a is four and the upper limit number of the number of reserved pieces for the second special figure display unit 37b is four, the upper limit number of the total number is eight. Will be. Therefore, when the total number is eight, eight reserved unit images GR are displayed side by side as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). Then, every time the total number decreases by one, the reserved unit image GR on the right side is not sequentially displayed. For example, when the total number is 4, four reserved unit image GRs are displayed from the left side. When the total number is 1, only the leftmost reserved unit image GR is displayed.

When a big hit result is selected in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and is provided with an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening as shown in FIG. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a big hit result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult for the prize to occur than in the open state.

The special figure unit 37 is provided with a round display unit 39 as a display unit for displaying the number of round games generated in the open / close execution mode. The round display unit 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is executed up to a predetermined number of round games. The round game is either that the special electric winning device 32 is opened until the predetermined opening continuation period elapses, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric winning device 32. It is a game that continues until the conditions are met. Specifically, in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once, and the opening continuation period when the special electric winning device 32 is opened once is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit of the number of one round game is set to 10. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. To. Then, in each round game, an opening continuation period of a time longer than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game is set. When the result of the first big hit described later or the result of the second big hit described later is obtained, the game shifts to the open / close execution mode in which the round game is performed eight times, and when the result of the third big hit described later is obtained, the round game is performed 16 times. It shifts to the open / close execution mode to be performed. The round display unit 39 displays the number of times of the round game or the corresponding display. Further, the display on the round display unit 39 is started when the open / close execution mode is started, and is ended when the open / close execution mode is ended and a new game round is started.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is colorless and transparently formed by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the gaming area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 54 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 55a opened upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a also opened upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 76, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 has a main control board housed in a board box. The substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded, and a bonding portion that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation is configured, or an adhesive layer remains on the bonding target at the time of peeling. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of what has been done is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a control device collective unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game ball paid out from the payout device 76 is discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with, for example, a back pack board having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying a main power supply of AC 24 volts.

The control device collective unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by the operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. It is equipped with a power supply / launch control device 78 that controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and a payout control device 77 is also connected to the input side. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 33a, 33b, 34c, 35a (hereinafter, various prize detection sensors 33a to 35a) are connected to the input port of the MPU 62. The various prize detection sensors 33a to 35a include the first special figure detection sensor 33a and the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33, the second actuation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34, and the through gate. 35 through detection sensors 35a are included. In addition to the above, the input port of the MPU 62 includes a sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning unit 31, and a sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the special electric winning device 32. Further, a payout control device 77 is connected to the input port of the MPU 62. Various commands and signals related to the payout of the game ball are received from the payout control device 77.

A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a voice emission control device 80 are connected to the output port of the MPU 62. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. When the payout control device 77 receives the prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Various commands such as fluctuation commands, type commands, and opening commands are output to the voice emission control device 80. The voice emission control device 80 is provided on the back side of the symbol display device 41.

The output port of the MPU 62 includes a special electric drive unit 32b for opening and closing the opening / closing door 32a of the special electric winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b for opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating device 34, a special drawing unit 37, and the special electric drawing unit 37. The door unit 38 is connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display unit 37a, a second special figure display unit 37b, a first special figure hold display unit 37c, a second special figure hold display unit 37d, and a round display unit 39. However, all of these are connected to the output port of the MPU 62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map hold display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output port of the MPU 62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the open / close execution mode. Further, when the open state of the general electric accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric accessory 34b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, in the game times and the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly shown, the display control of the general drawing unit 38 is executed in the MPU 62.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storage retention is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60. Further, the power supply / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The voice emission control device 80 includes a voice emission control board 81 on which the MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 is a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built-in.

The MPU 82 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the like, based on the command received from the main control device 60. Then, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is performed so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. I do.

The MPU 82 is electrically connected to the display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the effect determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. The display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the voice emission control device 80, and communicates with the voice emission control device 80 more than the voice emission control device 80 in relation to the main control device 60. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction. Further, the display control device 90 is provided on the back side of the symbol display device 41 together with the voice emission control device 80.

The display control device 90 is a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92, which is an element in which a program ROM 93 and a work RAM 94 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 95, a character ROM 96, and a video RAM 97, respectively, are mounted. It is equipped with. The MPU 92 analyzes various commands received from the voice emission control device 80 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 95 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 95). The program ROM 93 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information. The work RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 92, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. Is.

The VDP95 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP95 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 95 adjusts the timings of the MPU 92, the video RAM 97, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 97 from the character ROM 96 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 96 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 96 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 97 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 97.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63 and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as a main side MPU 62, a main side ROM 63 and a main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83 and RAM 84 of the voice emission control device 80 are sound respectively. The optical side MPU 82, the sound light side ROM 83, and the sound light side RAM 84 are referred to, and the MPU 92, the program ROM 93, and the work RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as a display side MPU 92, a display side ROM 93, and a display side RAM 94, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 62>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery on the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

The main MPU 62 uses various counter information during the game to draw a winning lottery, set the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, set the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and set the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. , The display of the normal figure display unit 38a is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the generation of the big hit result and the big hit type are determined. The jackpot type counter C2 used for the above, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, and the display of the game times in the special symbol display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 continues. The variation type counter CS used when determining the period and the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1 are used. Further, the normal electric random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating device 34 is set to the general electric open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CS, CINI, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 101 of the main RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CS, CINI, and C4 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, the counter returns to "0". Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS is the special figure holding area 102 when a prize is generated in the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34. Stored in. The special figure holding area 102 includes a holding area 103 and an execution area 119 for special drawing.

The holding area 103 includes a first area 111, a second area 112, a third area 113, a fourth area 114, a fifth area 115, a sixth area 116, a seventh area 117, and an eighth area 118. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS is the special figure side hold information (the first) according to the winning history to the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34. It is stored in any of the areas 111 to 118 as 1 special drawing side holding information and 2nd special drawing side holding information). In this case, in the first area 111 to the eighth area 118, when a prize is generated in the first actuating device 33 or the second actuating device 34 in a situation where the game round cannot be newly started, the first area is the first area. The special figure side hold information is stored in chronological order in the order of 111 → 2nd area 112 → 3rd area 113 → 4th area 114 → 5th area 115 → 6th area 116 → 7th area 117 → 8th area 118. go. By providing the eight areas 111 to 118 in this way, up to eight winning histories of the game ball to the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34 can be reserved and stored. ..

Identification areas 111a to 118a are provided in each of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118. In each of the identification areas 111a to 118a, identification indicating which of the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information is stored in the corresponding area of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118. Information is stored. When the special figure side hold information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first actuating device 33, the special figure side hold information is held on the first special figure side. It becomes information. Therefore, when the special figure side hold information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first actuating device 33, the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 Among them, the identification areas 111a to 118a in which the special figure side reserved information is stored stores information indicating that the special figure side reserved information is the first special figure side reserved information. Further, when the special figure side hold information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second operation detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. In the identification areas 111a to 118a in which the special figure side reserved information is stored among the first to eighth areas 111 to 118, information indicating that the special figure side reserved information is stored is stored in the identification areas 111a to 118a.

As described above, since the holding areas 103 are provided with the first to eighth areas 111 to 118, up to eight winning histories of game balls to the first operating device 33 or the second operating device 34 are reserved. Although it is stored, the maximum number of reserved information on the first special figure side is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved information on the second special figure side is also set to four. .. Therefore, if a game ball is detected by the first special drawing detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33 in a situation where four first special drawing side holding information is already held and stored, the holding area 103 Even if the total number of reserved information on the special drawing side stored in is less than eight, new holding information on the first special drawing side is not stored. Similarly, in a situation where four pieces of the second special figure side hold information are already held and stored, the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first operating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second operating device 34 can be used. When a game ball is detected, even if the total number of special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 is less than 8, the new hold storage of the second special figure side hold information is Not done.

The number of items that can be stored on hold in the hold area is not limited to eight, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or nine or more. Further, the number of the first special figure side hold information that can be held and stored is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular. Further, the number of the second special figure side hold information that can be held and stored is not limited to four, and may be arbitrary, and may be another plurality such as two, three, or five or more. It may be singular. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the upper limit number of the reserved information on the first special drawing side and the reserved information on the second special drawing side are the same, and the upper limit number may be different.

The execution area 119 for the special figure stores the special figure side hold information for which the hit / fail judgment and the type judgment for the special figure are to be performed when the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b. It is an area to be done. Specifically, when the variable display is started by any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the special figure side hold information stored in the first area 111 in the hold area 103 is executed for the special figure. Moved to area 119. In this case, information indicating that the special drawing side holding information is set is set in the identification area 111a of the first area 111 to which the special drawing side holding information is moved to the execution area 119 for special drawing. If so, the first special figure display unit 37a is the target for starting the variable display. On the other hand, when the identification area 111a of the first area 111, which is the target for moving the special drawing side reserved information to the special drawing execution area 119, is set with information indicating that the special drawing side reserved information is the second special drawing side reserved information. The second special figure display unit 37b is the target for starting the variable display.

The information corresponding to the normal electric random number counter C4 is stored in the normal figure holding area 121 when a prize is won in the through gate 35. The normal figure holding area 121 includes a first area 122a, a second area 122b, a third area 122c, and a fourth area 122d, and numerical information of the normal electric random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 122a to 122d as the reserved information on the normal map side. In this case, in the first area 122a to the fourth area 122d, when the through gate 35 is won in a situation where the variation display in the normal map display unit 38a cannot be newly started, the first area 122a → Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the second area 122b → the third area 122c → the fourth area 122d. By providing the four areas 122a to 122d in this way, up to four winning histories of the game ball to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored. It should be noted that the number that can be reserved and stored in the normal figure holding area 121 is not limited to four, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more, and may be a single number. May be.

An execution area 123 for a normal map is provided in the normal map hold area 121. The execution area 123 for the normal map is an area in which the hold information on the normal map side to be determined for support is stored when the variable display is started by the normal map display unit 38a. Specifically, when the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a is started, the normal map side hold information stored in the first area 122a of the normal map hold area 121 is moved to the execution area 123 for the normal map. To.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the Fuden random number counter C4 will be described. The normal electric random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order in the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The normal electric random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal figure holding area 121 of the main RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric accessory 34a to the open state by the value of the stored general electric random number counter C4.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the general electric accessory 34a of the second actuating device 34 is per unit time when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of opening is relatively high or low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power open state in the normal power open lottery using the normal power random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5), but it is high. In the frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power accessory 34a is opened when the normal power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open period is set longer. There is. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the open state of the general electric power is won and the open state of the public electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing period is set shorter than the one-time opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured period for the next public-electric open lottery to be held after one public-electric open lottery is performed (that is, the general-purpose map), compared to the low-frequency support mode. The one-time display continuation period on the display unit 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating device 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first actuating device 33 is higher than that of the second actuating device 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second actuation is higher than that of the first actuating device 33. The probability of winning a prize in the device 34 increases.

In addition, the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the open state per unit time is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode, and the configuration is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the public electric open state. In addition, the securing period secured for the next public power opening lottery after one public power opening lottery is performed (for example, it is executed on the normal power display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display periods are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing period or the average securing period is shorter in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode. May be good. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening period is lengthened, and the securing period secured for the next Fuden opening lottery after one Fuden opening lottery is held is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions or any combination of the conditions of shortening the average period and increasing the winning probability, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

When the normal electric open state is won in the general electric open lottery using the normal electric random number counter C4, the general electric open state is set. The general electric power open state ends when the general electric power accessory 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins a prize in the second actuating device 34. Specifically, regarding these contents, the upper limit number is 10 in common in any of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening and closing of the utility object 34a is once in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is more than one in the low-frequency support mode, which is specific. It is 3 times. Further, the one-time opening period of the general electric accessory 34a is 1 sec in the low-frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 sec in the high-frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and at the timing when the game ball is detected by the first special drawing detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33, it is held as a part of the holding information on the first special drawing side. The second special figure side hold information is stored in the area 103 at the timing when the game ball is detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. It is stored in the holding area 103 as a part of the information of. Then, the winning / failing determination is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that is won in the winning / failing determination is stored in the main ROM 63 as a winning / failing table. In the win / fail table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the win / fail result. The jackpot result is a winning / failing result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can also be a trigger for shifting to at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The deviation result is a winning / failing result that does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode and also does not trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode.

As the pass / fail table, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the same winning / failing table is referred to in the first special drawing side holding information and the second special drawing side holding information, and in any case, the winning / failing lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery There are a low probability mode and a high probability mode.

Specifically, each winning / failing table will be described. In the winning / failing table for the low probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in a big hit is seven. Other than that, it is the value of the random number that results in the deviation. In the hit / fail table for the high probability mode, the number of random numbers that result in a big hit is set to be larger than that in the case of the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, and specifically, the number is 60. In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the high probability mode.

If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary, and the hit result is a jackpot result in the low probability mode. The value group of the random number counter C1 may or may not be included in the value group of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit winner in the high probability mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to add "1" in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball is detected by the first special drawing detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33, it is held as a part of the holding information on the first special drawing side. The second special figure side hold information is stored in the area 103 at the timing when the game ball is detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. It is stored in the holding area 103 as a part of the information of. Then, the type determination of the jackpot result is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2.

The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a type table in the main ROM 63. The contents of the type table will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b). As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a first jackpot result, a second jackpot result, and a third jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results in the type table.

In the first jackpot result, the open / close execution mode is set in which the round game occurs eight times. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode continues until eight game rounds are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when the eight game rounds are digested, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until 25 game rounds are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when 25 game rounds are digested, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode until the eight game times are exhausted, and the eight game times are exhausted. The game state is such that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode until the 25 game times are exhausted.

If any of the jackpot results is obtained after the opening / closing execution mode is executed and before the eight game rounds are exhausted, eight times will be performed after the opening / closing execution mode ending with the newly generated jackpot result as a trigger. It becomes a high probability mode that continues until the game times are exhausted. In addition, if any of the jackpot results is obtained after the execution of the open / close execution mode and before the 25 game rounds are exhausted, the new jackpot result will be obtained after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the newly generated jackpot result. It becomes a high-frequency support mode that continues until the number of game times corresponding to the generated jackpot result is exhausted.

In the second big hit result, the open / close execution mode is set in which the round game occurs eight times. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode continues until the eight game rounds are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when the eight game rounds are exhausted, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until 50 game times are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when 50 game times are exhausted, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode until the eight game times are exhausted, and the eight game times are exhausted. The game state is such that the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode until the 50 game times are exhausted.

If any of the jackpot results is obtained after the opening / closing execution mode is executed and before the eight game rounds are exhausted, eight times will be performed after the opening / closing execution mode ending with the newly generated jackpot result as a trigger. It becomes a high probability mode that continues until the game times are exhausted. In addition, if any of the jackpot results is obtained after the execution of the open / close execution mode and before the 50 game rounds are exhausted, the new jackpot result will be obtained after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the newly generated jackpot result. It becomes a high-frequency support mode that continues until the number of game times corresponding to the generated jackpot result is exhausted.

In the third big hit result, the open / close execution mode is set in which the round game occurs 16 times. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode is set regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode shift. This high-probability mode continues until eight game rounds are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when the eight game rounds are digested, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode. Further, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until 50 game times are exhausted after the end of the open / close execution mode, and when 50 game times are exhausted, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode. In other words, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode until the eight game times are exhausted, and the eight game times are exhausted. After the game is played, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode until the 50 game times are exhausted.

If any of the jackpot results is obtained after the opening / closing execution mode is executed and before the eight game rounds are exhausted, eight times will be performed after the opening / closing execution mode ending with the newly generated jackpot result as a trigger. It becomes a high probability mode that continues until the game times are exhausted. In addition, if any of the jackpot results is obtained after the execution of the open / close execution mode and before the 50 game rounds are exhausted, the new jackpot result will be obtained after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by the newly generated jackpot result. It becomes a high-frequency support mode that continues until the number of game times corresponding to the generated jackpot result is exhausted.

As described above, any of the first jackpot result, the second jackpot result, and the third jackpot result will be in the gaming state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. The high-probability mode ends when eight game rounds are exhausted after the open / close execution mode ends regardless of the type of jackpot result. In this case, the number of special figure side hold information that can be held and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 is eight. That is, the number of game times in which the high-probability mode is maintained after the open / close execution mode ends is equal to or greater than the number of reserved information on the special figure side that can be held and stored. Therefore, all the special figure side hold information stored on hold at the time when the open / close execution mode ends is digested in the situation of the high probability mode.

Of the 1st jackpot result, the 2nd jackpot result, and the 3rd jackpot result, the 1st jackpot result and the 2nd jackpot result have 8 round games in the open / close execution mode, whereas the 3rd jackpot result opens / closes. The number of round games in the execution mode is 16. In addition, the number of game times in which the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the end of the open / close execution mode is 25 for the first jackpot result, while the second jackpot result and the third jackpot result are 50 times. be. Therefore, the third jackpot result is the most advantageous, then the second jackpot result is the most advantageous, and the first jackpot result is the least advantageous.

As the type table, as shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), a type table for the first special figure used for determining the type of the reserved information on the first special figure side and a second special figure side. A type table for the second special figure used for determining the type of the pending information is set. Regardless of whether it is the type table for the first special figure or the type table for the second special figure, the type of the jackpot result to be sorted is one of the first jackpot result, the second jackpot result, and the third jackpot result. It has become. In this case, in the type table for the first special figure, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 39" corresponds to the first jackpot result, and "40 to 79". Corresponds to the second jackpot result, and "80 to 99" corresponds to the third jackpot result. On the other hand, in the type table for the second special figure, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 99", "0 to 29" corresponds to the first jackpot result, and "30 to 79" is the first. It corresponds to the 2 big hit results, and "80 to 99" corresponds to the 3rd big hit result. Although the probability that the third jackpot result is selected is the same in the type table for the first special figure and the type table for the second special figure, in the case of the type table for the second special figure, it is for the first special figure. The probability that the first jackpot result is selected is lower than that in the type table of, and the probability that the second jackpot result is selected is set higher. Therefore, the type of jackpot result that can be selected when the jackpot result is generated is the case where the second special figure side hold information is the trigger rather than the case where the first special figure side hold information is the trigger. Is more advantageous for the player. However, the advantage may be the same or substantially the same for the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information, and the first special figure side hold information is the second special figure side hold information. It may be configured to have a higher advantage than that.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order in the range of 0 to 238, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when the game ball is detected by the first special drawing detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33, it is held as a part of the holding information on the first special drawing side. The second special figure side hold information is stored in the area 103 at the timing when the game ball is detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. It is stored in the holding area 103 as a part of the information of.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is a symbol display device 41 that is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying variable symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is given as a result of a game that results in a predetermined jackpot. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol in the above is started, it means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to be the grant correspondence result. Specifically, regarding the grant correspondence result, the combination of symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the occurrence of the grant response result in the stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying a part of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the symbol display device 41, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in the remaining symbol rows. The display state that displays the fluctuation of is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface of the symbol display device 41 to perform a reach effect.

In the notice display, after the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbol, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, the background screen has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display can occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed has a higher probability than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur in.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game round corresponding to the deviation result, the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the special figure side hold information that triggered the start of the game round is stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 63. Executed when it corresponds to the stored reach correspondence value.

On the other hand, the determination of whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main MPU 62, but by the sound and light side MPU 82. In this case, in the sound / light side MPU 82, the notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results, and the notice display with a lower appearance rate occurs than in the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that are easy to perform. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the game rotation effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

Next, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to, for example, add "1" in order in the range of 0 to 198, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and when the game ball is detected by the first special drawing detection sensor 33a of the first operating device 33, it is held as a part of the holding information on the first special drawing side. The second special figure side hold information is stored in the area 103 at the timing when the game ball is detected by the second special figure detection sensor 33b of the first actuating device 33 or the second operation detection sensor 34c of the second actuating device 34. It is stored in the holding area 103 as a part of the information of. The variation type counter CS is used in the main MPU 62 to determine the display continuation period of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, the second special figure display unit 37b, and the symbol display device 41.

<Regarding the prerequisite processing configuration for the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed for advancing the game on the main MPU 62 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 62 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is started. After that, the access of the main RAM 64 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 62 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power / emission control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 64. (Step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). Step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, at the start of business of the game hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as the initialization of the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64 such as initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is issued to the voice emission control device 80 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, a residual period is generated between the timer interrupt processing of one and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual period varies depending on the processing completion timing of each timer interrupt process, but the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 64, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started every 4 milliseconds.

First, the power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 65, and if the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure processing is executed.

After that, the lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing a process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information. Executes the process of overwriting the read source counter. In this case, when the counter value exceeds the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

After that, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 64.

After that, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (step S206). If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the relevant information is concerned. Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating device 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is obtained. If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, signals received from various detection sensors including the winning detection sensors 33a to 35a are read, and the general winning unit 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating device 33, and the second operating device 34 are read. And the process of specifying whether or not the ball has entered the through gate 35 is executed.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 64 is executed. In this case, the timer counters to which the stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are collectively handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are collectively performed. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation is continued for the firing operation device 28, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 33a to 35a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208. conduct.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the open / close execution mode is executed. The processing content of the special figure special electric control process will be described in detail later.

In the following step S214, the Fuzu Fuden control process is executed. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the numerical information of the Fuden random number counter C4 is executed, and when the numerical information is stored. A public drawing open lottery is performed for the numerical information, and further, the normal drawing opening lottery is used as an opportunity to execute a process for performing a normal drawing effect on the normal drawing display unit 38a. Further, based on the result of the public electric opening lottery, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating device 34 is executed. In the normal power control process, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the control corresponding to the low frequency support mode is performed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the control corresponding to the high frequency support mode is performed. However, in the open / close execution mode, control corresponding to the low frequency support mode is performed regardless of the support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the increase / decrease number of the first special figure side hold information related to the first special figure display unit 37a is reflected in the first special figure hold display unit 37c. Output information setting for, output information setting for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the 2nd special figure side hold information related to the 2nd special figure display unit 37b to the 2nd special figure hold display unit 37d, and the normal figure display unit. The output information is set so that the increase / decrease number of the reserved information on the normal map side related to 38a is reflected in the reserved display unit 38b of the normal map. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214. , Set the output information for updating the display contents of the general map display unit 38a. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display content of the round display unit 39 is set based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S213.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, the external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after the processes of steps S207 to S218 are executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special figure special electric control process, a process for acquiring the special figure side hold information is executed when a prize is generated in the first actuating device 33 or the second actuating device 34, and the special figure side hold information is generated. If it is stored, a hit / fail determination is made for the reserved information on the special figure side, and further, a process for performing a game rotation effect is executed with the hit / fail determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, the process of shifting to the open / close execution mode is executed after the execution of the game rotation effect, and the process of being in the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

Specifically, first, the pending information acquisition process is executed (step S301). FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the pending information. When the first special figure detection sensor 33a of the first actuating device 33 is ON (step S401: YES), the number of the first special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 is the upper limit. Is determined (step S402). Specifically, among the identification areas 111a to 118a of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 in the hold area 103, there are four areas in which the information corresponding to the first special figure side hold information is stored. Judge whether or not it is done.

If a negative determination is made in step S402, the first special figure side reserved information acquisition process is executed (step S403). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are set to any of the special figures side of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 in the holding area 103. Hold information is also stored in the uppermost area where it is not stored. Further, in the acquisition process, the information corresponding to the reserved information on the first special figure side is stored in the identification areas 111a to 118a corresponding to the areas 111 to 118 to be stored.

After that, the destination identification process is executed (step S404). In this future identification process, the information on which the first special figure side hold information acquired this time is a jackpot result in the low probability mode, the information on which the jackpot result is obtained in the high probability mode, the information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach, and the predetermined reach are. Identify whether it corresponds to any of the information corresponding to different reach occurrences. That is, the identification of these various types of information is executed when the first special figure side hold information becomes the start target of the game round, but prior to that, these are executed when the first special figure side hold information is acquired. Various information is specified in the prior identification process. Even if the advance identification process is executed, if the game is to be started, the information specified in the advance identification process is not used as it is, but the above-mentioned various information is specified again. .. However, even if the above-mentioned various information is specified again at the start of the game round, the same information as the first special figure side reserved information referred to at the start of the game round is referred to in the prior identification process. Therefore, the information specified at the start of the game round corresponds to the information specified in the prior identification process.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the destination identification process. In the pre-specification process, first, the pass / fail table for the low probability mode is read from the main ROM 63 (step S501). Then, the hit / fail determination process is executed with reference to the read hit / miss table for the low probability mode (step S502). In the hit / fail determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 in the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the value of the random number that is the jackpot result in the hit / miss table for the low probability mode. Here, as described above, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. Therefore, when it is determined in the hit / fail determination process of step S502 that the jackpot result is supported (step S503: YES), both the jackpot information at the low probability and the jackpot information at the high probability are set in the main RAM 64. (Step S504). The jackpot information at the time of low probability is the information indicating that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the jackpot result in the low probability mode, and the jackpot information at the time of high probability is the information that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the high probability mode. It is information showing that it becomes a big hit result in.

When a negative determination is made in step S503, the pass / fail table for the high probability mode is read from the main ROM 63 (step S505). Then, the winning / failing determination process is executed with reference to the read-out hit / miss table for the high-probability mode (step S506). In the hit / fail determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 in the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the value of the random number that is the jackpot result in the hit / miss table for the high probability mode. When it is determined in the hit / fail determination process of step S506 that the jackpot result is supported (step S507: YES), the jackpot information at the time of high probability is set in the main RAM 64 (step S508).

If a negative determination is made in step S507, the reach determination process is executed (step S509). In the reach determination process, the reach table is read from the main ROM 63, and whether the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 in the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the reach corresponding value stored in the reach table. Judge whether or not. When it is determined in the reach determination process that the reach is generated (step S510: YES), the display continuation period specifying process is executed (step S511). In the process of specifying the display continuation period, the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence is read from the main ROM 63, and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS in the special figure side hold information acquired this time is displayed in the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the value specified as the display continuation period of the occurrence of the predetermined reach. The predetermined reach is set as a reach with a higher expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result than in the case of a specific reach, and as the predetermined reach, for example, a reach effect by a predetermined character is executed.

In step S512, it is determined whether or not the result of the specification processing of the display continuation period corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach. If an affirmative determination is made in step S512, predetermined reach information is set in the main RAM 64 (step S513). The predetermined reach information is information indicating that the predetermined reach occurs when the reserved information on the special figure side acquired this time becomes the start target of the game round. If a negative determination is made in step S512, non-predetermined reach information is set in the main RAM 64 (step S514). The non-predetermined reach information is information indicating that a reach other than the predetermined reach occurs when the special figure side reserved information acquired this time becomes the start target of the game round.

In addition, instead of specifying whether or not a predetermined reach occurs in steps S511 and S512, it may be configured to specify whether or not a reach display of a predetermined jackpot expectation or higher occurs. In this case, in step S513, the information indicating that the reach display of the predetermined jackpot expectation or higher occurs is set in the main RAM 64, and in step S514, the information indicating that the reach display of less than the predetermined jackpot expectation occurs is set. It will be set in the main RAM 64. Further, it may be configured to determine whether or not the display continuation period exceeds a predetermined period in steps S511 and S512. In this case, in step S513, information indicating that the display continuation period is longer than the predetermined period is set in the main RAM 64, and in step S514, information indicating that the display continuation period is less than the predetermined period is set in the main RAM 64. The Rukoto.

Returning to the description of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 12), after the destination identification process is executed in step S404, the transmission process of the first hold command corresponding to the result of the destination identification process is executed (step S405). .. In the transmission process of the first hold command, the information corresponding to the content specified in the advance identification process of step S404, the information indicating that the hold information on the first special figure side is supported, and the first special acquired this time. A first hold command including information indicating which of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 of the hold area 103 is stored in the hold information on the drawing side is read from the main ROM 63 and transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. ..

As information corresponding to the content specified in the destination identification process, for example, when the process of step S504 is executed in the destination identification process of step S404, the first hold command includes jackpot information at low probability and high probability. Includes jackpot information. Further, when the process of step S508 is executed in the prior identification process of step S404, the first hold command includes the jackpot information at the time of high probability. Further, when the process of step S513 is executed in the prior identification process of step S404, the first hold command includes predetermined reach information. Further, when the process of step S514 is executed in the prior identification process of step S404, the first hold command includes non-predetermined reach information. If any of the processes of step S504, step S508, step S513, and step S514 is not executed in the prior identification process of step S404, the first hold command contains information corresponding to the processing result of the prior identification process. Is not set.

When a negative determination is made in step S401, an affirmative determination is made in step S402, or the process of step S405 is executed, the second special figure detection sensor 33b or the second actuating device 34 of the first actuating device 33 is executed. It is determined whether or not the second operation detection sensor 34c of the above is ON (step S406). When an affirmative determination is made in step S406, it is determined whether or not the number of the second special figure side reserved information stored in the reserved area 103 has reached the upper limit (step S407). Specifically, among the identification areas 111a to 118a of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 in the hold area 103, there are four areas in which the information corresponding to the second special figure side hold information is stored. Judge whether or not it is done.

If a negative determination is made in step S407, the second special figure side reserved information acquisition process is executed (step S408). In the acquisition process, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are set to any of the special figures side of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 in the holding area 103. Hold information is also stored in the uppermost area where it is not stored. Further, in the acquisition process, the information corresponding to the second special figure side reserved information is stored in the identification areas 111a to 118a corresponding to the storage target areas 111 to 118.

After that, the destination identification process is executed (step S409). The content of the pre-specifying process is the same as the content of the pre-specifying process in step S404. That is, in step S404, by executing the processes of steps S501 to S514 for the newly acquired first special figure side hold information, the jackpot information and high probability at the time of low probability for the first special figure side hold information. One of the jackpot information, the predetermined reach information, and the non-predetermined reach information of the time is set, but in step S409, the process of steps S501 to S514 is executed for the newly acquired second special figure side reserved information. , One of the jackpot information at the time of low probability, the jackpot information at the time of high probability, the predetermined reach information, and the non-predetermined reach information is set for the second special figure side reserved information.

After that, the transmission process of the second hold command is executed (step S410). In the transmission process of the second hold command, the information corresponding to the content specified in the prior identification process of step S409, the information indicating that the second special figure side hold information is supported, and the second special acquired this time. A second hold command including information indicating which of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 of the hold area 103 is stored in the hold information on the drawing side is read from the main ROM 63 and transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 82. ..

As information corresponding to the content specified in the destination identification process, for example, when the process of step S504 is executed in the destination identification process of step S409, the second hold command includes jackpot information at low probability and high probability. Includes jackpot information. Further, when the process of step S508 is executed in the prior identification process of step S409, the second hold command includes the jackpot information at the time of high probability. Further, when the process of step S513 is executed in the prior identification process of step S409, the second hold command includes predetermined reach information. Further, when the process of step S514 is executed in the prior identification process of step S409, the second hold command includes non-predetermined reach information. If any of the processes of step S504, step S508, step S513, and step S514 is not executed in the prior identification process of step S409, the second hold command contains information corresponding to the processing result of the prior identification process. Is not set.

Here, the processing contents of the sound light side MPU 82 when the first hold command and the second hold command are received will be described. First, the effect side holding area 125 provided in the sound light side RAM 84 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the production side holding area 125 includes a first unit area 125a, a second unit area 125b, a third unit area 125c, a fourth unit area 125d, a fifth unit area 125e, and the like. The 6-unit area 125f, the 7th unit area 125g, and the 8th unit area 125h are set. These first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h correspond one-to-one with the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 of the holding area 103 provided in the main RAM 64. That is, the nth unit areas 125a to 125h and the nth areas 111 to 118 correspond to each other, and the nth unit areas 125a to 125h correspond to the special drawing side reserved information stored in the nth areas 111 to 118. Information on the processing result of the destination identification process is stored, and information indicating which of the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information corresponds to the special figure side hold information is stored. Will be done.

Each of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h has a high probability hit / miss area, a low probability hit / miss area, a predetermined reach presence / absence area, a non-predetermined reach presence / absence area, and a hold display area. It is set. In the hit / miss area at the time of high probability, information indicating whether or not the special figure side hold information for which the jackpot information at the time of high probability is set in the prior identification process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 62 is stored is stored. In the hit / miss area at the time of low probability, information indicating whether or not the special figure side hold information for which the jackpot information at the time of low probability is set in the prior identification process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 62 is stored is stored. In the presence / absence area of the predetermined reach, information indicating whether or not the predetermined reach information is set as the reserved information on the special figure side in the prior identification process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 62 is stored. In the non-predetermined reach presence / absence area, information indicating whether or not the non-predetermined reach information is set as the special figure side reserved information in the prior identification process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 62 is stored. In the hold display area, information indicating whether the corresponding special figure side hold information is the first special figure side hold information or the second special figure side hold information is stored, and the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 is stored. Information on the display mode (specifically, the display color) of the hold unit image GR to be displayed on the display is stored.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a reception process of a hold command executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The process of receiving the hold command is activated when the first hold command or the second hold command is received.

First, the process of grasping the write target area is executed (step S601). As described above, in the first hold command and the second hold command, which of the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 of the hold area 103 is stored in the special figure side hold information that triggered the transmission. The information of the storage destination to be shown is set. In the process of grasping the write target area, the storage destination information set in the first hold command or the second hold command received this time among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 is used. Understand the corresponding area. When the storage destination information corresponds to the nth areas 111 to 118 of the holding area 103, the nth unit areas 125a to 125h are grasped in the writing target area grasping process. In this way, the storage destination information indicating in which of the 1st to 8th areas 111 to 118 of the holding area 103 the special drawing side holding information that triggered the transmission of the holding command is stored in the holding command itself. Is set, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the correspondence between the hold area 103 of the main RAM 64 and the effect side hold area 125 of the sound light side RAM 84.

When the jackpot information at the time of high probability is set in the first hold command or the second hold command received this time (step S602: YES), the height of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601. The jackpot information at the time of high probability is set in the hit / miss area at the time of probability (step S603). When a negative determination is made in step S602, the hit / fail area at the time of high probability of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is cleared by "0".

When the jackpot information at the time of low probability is set in the first hold command or the second hold command received this time (step S604: YES), the low of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601. The jackpot information at the time of low probability is set in the hit / miss area at the time of probability (step S605). When a negative determination is made in step S604, the hit / fail area at the time of low probability of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is cleared by "0".

When the predetermined reach information is set in the first hold command or the second hold command received this time (step S606: YES), the presence or absence of the predetermined reach in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601. Predetermined reach information is set in the area (step S607). When a negative determination is made in step S606, the presence / absence area of the predetermined reach of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is cleared by "0".

When non-predetermined reach information is set in the first hold command or the second hold command received this time (step S608: YES), the non-predetermined reach of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601. Non-predetermined reach information is set in the presence / absence area (step S609). When a negative determination is made in step S608, the non-predetermined reach presence / absence area of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is cleared by "0".

After executing the processes of steps S601 to S609, the setting process for the hold display area is executed (step S610). In the setting process, if the hold command received this time is the first hold command, the hold display area of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is the hold information on the first special figure side. If the hold command received this time is the second hold command, the hold display area of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h grasped in step S601 is set to the hold display area on the second special figure side. Set the information indicating that there is.

After that, the setting process of the hold effect is executed (step S611). In the hold effect setting process, the process for starting the hold effect is executed in response to the newly acquired special figure side hold information. The process will be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S301, the information of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 64 is read out (step S302), and the main The special figure special electric address table stored in the side ROM 63 is read (step S303). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S304).

The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the game rotation effect and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as the process for controlling the game turn effect, the special figure variation start process (step S306), which is the process for starting the game turn effect, and the process for advancing the game turn effect. A certain special figure changing process (step S307) and a special figure finalizing process (step S308), which is a process for ending the game rotation effect, are set. Further, as the process for controlling the open / close execution mode, the special electric start process (step S309), which is the process for controlling the opening of the open / close execution mode, and the process for controlling the open state of the special electric winning device 32. The special electric power opening process (step S310), the special electric power closing process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric power winning device 32, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode. A special electric termination process (step S312), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state of the above, is set. In such a processing configuration, the special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing should be executed. The start address of the program for executing the above-mentioned plurality of types of processing is set corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter.

After executing the process of step S304, in step S305, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S304 is executed. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "0", the start address of SA0 is acquired and jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process of step S306, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is "1". If, the start address of SA1 is acquired and the process jumps to the process during special figure change in step S307. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the start address of SA2 is acquired and step S308 is performed. If the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the start address of SA3 is acquired and the process jumps to the special electric start processing of step S309, and the value of the special figure special electric counter is changed. If it is "4", the start address of SA4 is acquired and jumps to the processing during opening of the special electric power in step S310. If the value of the special electric power counter of the special figure is "5", the start address of SA5 is acquired. It jumps to the special electric closed processing in step S311, and when the value of the special electric special electric counter is "6", it acquires the start address of SA6 and jumps to the special electric end processing in step S312. When any of the processes of steps S306 to S312 is executed, the special figure special electric control process is terminated. Hereinafter, the processes of steps S306 to S312 will be described individually.

<Special figure change start processing>
First, the special figure fluctuation start processing in step S306 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When either the first special figure side hold information or the second special figure side hold information is stored in the hold area 103 (step S701: YES), the data setting process is executed (step S702). In the data setting process, the first special figure side hold information or the second special figure side hold information stored in the first area 111 of the hold area 103 is moved to the execution area 119 for the special figure. In this case, not only the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 stored in the first area 111, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3, and the numerical information of the variable type counter CS, but also the identification area 111a. The information stored in is also moved to the execution area 119 for special figures. Further, if the special figure side hold information moved to the execution area 119 for the special figure is the first special figure side hold information, the display content of the first special figure hold display unit 37c corresponds to the decrease in the number of hold pieces. If the special figure side hold information moved to the execution area 119 for special figure by setting the data so that it can be changed to the displayed content is the second special figure side hold information, the second special figure hold display is displayed. Data is set so that the display content of the unit 37d is changed to the display content corresponding to the decrease in the number of reserved pieces.

In the data setting process, the process of shifting the data stored in the first to eighth areas 111 to 118 of the hold area 103 to the upper side is executed thereafter. Specifically, the second area 112 → the first area 111, the third area 113 → the second area 112, the fourth area 114 → the third area 113, the fifth area 115 → the fourth area 114, the sixth area 116 → After shifting the data in each area such as 5th area 115, 7th area 117 → 6th area 116, 8th area 118 → 7th area 117, the 8th area 118 is cleared to “0”. At the time of this shift, the data stored in the identification areas 111a to 118a is also shifted.

After executing the data setting process, the pass / fail determination process is executed (step S703). In the win / fail determination process, it is first determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, the hit / fail table for the high probability mode provided in the main ROM 63 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure, the information for hit / fail determination, that is, the winning random number. It is determined whether or not the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure is referred to by referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main ROM 63. Determines if is consistent with the low probability jackpot numerical information.

When the result of the hit / fail determination process is the jackpot winning result (step S704: YES), the type determination process is executed (step S705). In the type determination process, if the hold information stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure is the hold information on the first special figure side, the type table for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 63, and the second special figure side. If it is hold information, the type table for the second special figure is read from the main ROM 63. Then, the type of the jackpot result is grasped by collating the read type table with the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure.

After that, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S706). Specifically, for the jackpot result, which is stored in advance in the main ROM 63, the information of the display mode in which the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is finally stopped and displayed in this game round. It is specified from the stop result table of, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the display mode to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S706, the information of the display mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S705 is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the display mode to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the display mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of display modes may be set for each jackpot result.

After that, the flag set process corresponding to the result of the type determination process is executed (step S707). Specifically, the main RAM 64 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result, and among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the flag corresponding to the result of the type determination process in step S705. Set to "1".

On the other hand, when it is determined in the hit / fail determination process that the jackpot is not won (step S704: NO), the stop result setting process for the loss result is executed (step S708). Specifically, the information on the display mode in which the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is finally stopped and displayed in this game is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance for the deviation result. It is specified from the stop result table of, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information of the display mode selected in this case is different from the information of the display mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the process of specifying the display continuation period is executed (step S709). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the display duration. When it is specified that the result is a big hit in the hit / fail determination process of the current game round (step S801: YES), the display continuation period table at the time of the big hit occurrence is read from the main ROM 63 (step S802). In the display continuation period table at the time of the jackpot occurrence, information on the display continuation period is set corresponding to a plurality of types of numerical ranges of the variable type counter CS. Further, since the reach display occurs in the game times that result in the big hit, only the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is set in the display continuation period table at the time of the big hit occurrence. Further, as the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display, the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach is included.

When the game times this time do not correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S801: NO), the reach table is read from the main ROM 63 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure is used. By collating the acquired numerical information with the reach table, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of the reach display (step S803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence is read from the main ROM 63 (step S804). In the display continuation period table at the time of reach occurrence, information on the display continuation period is set corresponding to a plurality of types of numerical ranges of the variable type counter CS. All of the information on the display continuation period set corresponds to the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display. In addition, the display continuation period corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach is included as the display continuation period corresponding to the reach display.

When a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 is equal to or more than the reference number of short fluctuations. (Step S805). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the special drawing side stored on hold is 7 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S805, the display continuation period table at the time of disconnection from the main ROM 63 is read out (step S806). In the display continuation period table at the time of disconnection, the number of table information referred to when the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 0 and the number of reserved information on the special figure side stored on hold are 1 to 1. The table information referred to when the number of pieces is three and the table information referred to when the number of the special figure side hold information stored on hold is 4 to 6 are included. In each of these table information, information on the display continuation period is set corresponding to a plurality of types of numerical ranges of the variable type counter CS. In this case, the average period of the selected display continuation period is a long period in the order of 4 to 6 table information → 1 to 3 table information → 0 table information.

When any of the processes of step S802, step S804, and step S806 is executed, the numerical information acquired from the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area 119 for the special figure is read out (step S807). Then, by collating the numerical information acquired from the variation type counter CS with the display continuation period table read out in any one of step S802, step S804, and step S806, the information of the display continuation period in the current game round can be obtained. Read (step S808).

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S805, short-term information is read out as information on the display continuation period in this game round (step S809). The short period is the shortest display duration that can be selected when referring to the display duration table when a jackpot occurs, the shortest display duration that can be selected when referring to the display duration table when a reach occurs, and the deviation. Corresponds to a period shorter than any of the shortest display durations that can be selected when referring to the display duration table at the time. Specifically, it is set to 1.5 seconds. In this way, in the situation where 7 pieces of special figure side hold information are held and stored, the shortest display continuation period should be selected when the game round corresponding to the off result where the reach display does not occur is started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the digestion efficiency of the reserved information on the special figure side, and it is possible to make it difficult to continue the situation in which the maximum number of reserved information on the special figure side is held and stored. The reference number of short fluctuations is not limited to 7, and may be 6 pieces, 5 pieces, or 4 pieces.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 16), after executing the display continuation period specifying process in step S709, the display continuation period information read in the specified process is provided in the main RAM 64. It is set in the timer counter (step S710). The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process in step S210 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). Incidentally, as a game rotation effect, switching display of the display mode on the first special figure display unit 37a or second special figure display unit 37b and variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed, and each variation display is performed. When it is terminated, the stop result of the game is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the effective line) for the final stop period (0.5 seconds). And the final stop is displayed. In this case, the display continuation period acquired in step S709 is the total period for one game, and in step S710, the display continuation period acquired in step S709 minus the final stop period. Set the information in the timer counter.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound / light side MPU 82 (step S711). The variable command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes the data corresponding to the result of the hit / miss judgment process, and the trigger of this game round is the first special figure side hold information and the first. 2 Data indicating which of the reserved information on the special figure side is included, data corresponding to the result of the type determination process, and data corresponding to the display continuation period are included. Specifically, the identification data for indicating that the command is a variable command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data, and the hit / fail determination process is performed by the next 4 bits of the data. And the lottery result data corresponding to the result of the type determination process is set, and which of the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information is triggered by the next 1-bit data? The trigger data indicating the above is set, and the period data corresponding to the display continuation period is set by the remaining 7-bit data. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the variation command, it recognizes that it is the variation command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the type determination process from the lottery result data. Then, the type of the special figure side hold information that triggered the execution of the current game round is recognized from the above-mentioned trigger data, and the display continuation period of the current game round is recognized from the above-mentioned period data. Here, since the main MPU 62 selects a display duration that differs depending on whether or not the reach display occurs, even if the variable command does not include information on whether or not the reach display occurs, the sound and light side In the MPU 82, it is possible to specify whether or not the reach display has occurred from the information on the display duration. In this respect, it can be said that the variable command contains information indicating whether or not the reach display has occurred. It should be noted that the variable command may include information that directly indicates whether or not the reach display has occurred.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the type judgment process, and whether the mode is high probability mode. It contains data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode and data on whether or not it is in high-frequency support mode. Specifically, identification data for indicating that the command is a type command is set by the upper 4 bits of the 2 bytes of data, and the hit / fail determination process and the pass / fail determination process are performed by the next 4 bits of data. The lottery result data corresponding to the result of the type determination process is set, and the state recognition data of whether or not it is in the high probability mode and whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode is set based on the remaining 8-bit data. It is set. Therefore, when the sound / light side MPU 82 receives the type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the identification data, and recognizes the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the type determination process from the lottery result data. From the above state recognition data, it is recognized whether or not it is a high probability mode and whether or not it is a high frequency support mode.

Here, both the variable command and the type command include data corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination process and the result of the type determination process. Therefore, in the sound / light side MPU 82, by collating the lottery result data included in the variation command with the lottery result data included in the type command, noise or the like may be generated regarding the reception of the variation command and the type command. It is possible to identify whether or not a communication error has occurred. Then, when both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variable command and the type command is executed, and when both lottery result data do not match. Can notify it. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound / light side MPU 82 may execute the game turn effect corresponding to the communication abnormality in the game turn, for example, in the game turn effect, the hit / fail determination process and the type determination process. Regardless of the result of, the symbol display device 41 may make sure that the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed. In this case, the game rotation effect may be performed over the display continuation period corresponding to the period data included in the variation command, or may be continued until the next variation command and type command are received. May be good. It should be noted that the variable command may be configured not to include one of the data of the result of the pass / fail determination process and the result of the type determination process, or may be configured not to include both data.

When the variation command and the type command are received, the sound / light side MPU 82 executes a process for starting the game rotation effect. When the game rotation effect is started, the symbol display device 41 starts the movement display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Then, when the game rotation effect is completed, the movement display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, the standby display is performed, and finally the static display is performed. In this case, the combination of symbols corresponding to the results of the hit / fail determination process and the type determination process is statically displayed.

After the process of step S711 is executed, the display unit on the execution target side of the game round of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b starts the switching display of the display mode (step). S712). After that, the special figure special electric counter is added by 1 (step S713). Since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "0" when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter becomes "1" when the processing of step S713 is executed. ..

<Processing during special figure change>
Next, the process during the change of the special figure in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

In the special figure change processing, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the final stop display during the display continuation period of the game times, and if it is before the final stop display, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second Among the special figure display units 37b, a process for regularly changing the display mode on the execution target side of this game round is executed. This regular change is continued until it is time to start the final stop display. In addition, this regular change is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether or not a hit result is obtained and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When it is time to display the final stop, the symbol display device 41 sends a final stop command to the sound / light side MPU 82 in order to display the stop result of this game round as the final stop, and the first special drawing. Of the display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display mode on the execution target side of the current game round is the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Further, the information of the final stop period (0.5 seconds) of the game round is read from the main ROM 63 and set in the timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process to the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process.

<Processing during special drawing confirmation>
Next, the process during special figure determination in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S901: YES), the open / close execution mode is started on condition that the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result (step S902: YES). To execute the process for. Specifically, first, the information of the opening period (10 seconds) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S903), and the read information of the opening period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 64 (step S904). After that, the opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82 (step S905). The opening command is a command for causing the sound / light side MPU 82 to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the open / close execution mode. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special figure finalizing process to the one corresponding to the special electric start process (step S906).

On the other hand, when the game times this time do not correspond to the jackpot result (step S902: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 64 (step S907). .. The high-probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the main-side MPU 62 sets the high-probability flag to the high-probability flag in the winning / failing determination process when starting the game round. By determining whether or not "" is set, it is specified which of the pass / fail table for the high-probability mode and the pass / fail table for the low-probability mode should be referred to as the pass / fail table. Further, the high probability flag is set to "1" when the open / close execution mode ends regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution.

When "1" is set in the high probability flag (step S907: YES), the value of the high probability continuation counter provided in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S908). The high-probability continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the number of times the game has been digested after the open / close execution mode has ended has reached the number of times that triggers the end of the high-probability mode. When the value of the high probability continuation counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S909: YES), the high probability flag is cleared to "0" (step S910).

Whether or not "1" is set in the high frequency flag provided in the main RAM 64 when a negative judgment is made in step S907, a negative judgment is made in step S909, or the process of step S910 is executed. (Step S911). The high frequency flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the main MPU 62 is a normal power control process (step S214) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). ), By determining whether or not "1" is set in the high-frequency flag, the high-frequency support mode can be used to determine the execution mode of the display control of the normal figure display unit 38a and the operation control of the second operating device 34. And identify which of the low frequency support modes should be supported. Further, the high frequency flag is set to "1" when the open / close execution mode ends regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution.

When "1" is set in the high frequency flag (step S911: YES), the value of the high frequency continuation counter provided in the main RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S912). The high-frequency continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the number of times the game has been digested after the open / close execution mode has ended has reached the number of times that triggers the end of the high-frequency support mode. When the value of the high frequency continuation counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S913: YES), the high frequency flag is cleared to "0" (step S914).

When a negative determination is made in step S911, a negative determination is made in step S913, or the process of step S914 is executed, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S915). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter changes from the one corresponding to the special figure determination processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Special electric start processing>
Next, the special electric start processing in step S309 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

When the opening period has elapsed, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 64. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode is triggered by the first jackpot result or the second jackpot result, "8" is set in the round counter, and if the open / close execution mode is triggered by the third jackpot result, the round counter is set. Set to "16". The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games by the main MPU 62 in the open / close execution mode. Further, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 64. The winning counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not a maximum number of game balls have been won in one round game. Further, information corresponding to the open duration (29 seconds) of one round game is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 64. Then, by starting the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. After that, by adding 1 to the special electric power counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric power opening processing.

<Processing while the special electric train is open>
Next, the processing during opening of the special power in step S310 in the special power control processing (FIG. 11) will be described.

In the special electric open processing, when the end condition of the round game is satisfied, the special electric winning device 32 is closed and the round counter is decremented by 1 by stopping the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b. .. Then, the closing period (2 seconds) is set in the timer counter. After that, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing.

<Processing while the special electric train is closed>
Next, the special electric closing process in step S311 in the special drawing special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

In the special electric closing processing, if the value of the round counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the closing period has elapsed. When the closing period has elapsed, "10" is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 64, and information corresponding to the opening continuation period (29 seconds) of one round game is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 64. set. Then, by starting the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b, the special electric winning device 32 is opened. After that, by subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric opening processing.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 82. The ending command is a command for making the sound / light side MPU 82 recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for the ending. Further, the information of the ending period (10 seconds) stored in advance in the main ROM 63 is read out, and the information of the ending period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 64. After that, by adding 1 to the special electric power counter, the value of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power end process.

<Special train end processing>
Next, the special electric stop processing in step S312 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the ending period has elapsed (step S1001: YES), "1" is set in the high probability flag of the main RAM 64 (step S1002), and "8" is set in the high probability continuation counter of the main RAM 64. (Step S1003). As a result, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode is continued until the game times are exhausted eight times.

After that, "1" is set in the high frequency flag of the main RAM 64 (step S1004). Then, when the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the result of the first big hit (step S1005: YES), "25" is set in the high frequency continuation counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1006), and the opening / closing execution of this time is executed. When the mode is triggered by the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result (step S1005: NO), "50" is set in the high frequency continuation counter of the main RAM 64 (step S1007). As a result, the support mode after the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game times are digested 25 times after the open / close execution mode triggered by the first big hit result. If it is after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second big hit result or the third big hit result, it continues until the game times are exhausted 50 times.

After that, the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0" (step S1008). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter changes from the one corresponding to the special electric end processing to the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing.

<Processing configuration for controlling the execution of the effect on the sound / light side MPU 82>
Next, a processing configuration executed for controlling the execution of the effect on the sound / light side MPU 82 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an effect control process for game rounds executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. It should be noted that the effect control process for the game round is repeatedly activated by the sound light side MPU 82 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

When the game rounding effect (that is, the effect executed in the game round) is not being executed (step S1101: NO), it is determined whether or not the variable command and the type command are received from the main MPU 62 (step S1102). ). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the game result is stored (step S1103). Specifically, from the information contained in the variable command and the type command, the result of the hit / fail judgment process and the result of the type judgment process executed by the main MPU 62 at the start of this game round are specified, and the result thereof is specified. The specified information is written in the sound / light side RAM 84. In the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variable command is collated with the lottery result data included in the type command, and the communication of these variable commands and the type command is normally performed. It may be determined whether or not the communication is broken, and if the communication is abnormal, the notification processing and the data storage processing corresponding to the communication may be performed.

After that, the storage process for the display continuation period is executed (step S1104). Specifically, the information of the display continuation period in the current game round is specified from the information included in the variable command, and the specified information is set in the timer counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84. The value set in the timer counter is decremented by 1 each time the effect control process for game rounds is activated.

After that, the effect side data shift process is executed (step S1105). In the effect side data shift process, the process of shifting the data stored in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 to the upper side is executed. Specifically, the second unit area 125b → the first unit area 125a, the third unit area 125c → the second unit area 125b, the fourth unit area 125d → the third unit area 125c, the fifth unit area 125e → the fourth unit. Data in each unit area 125a to 125h, such as area 125d, 6th unit area 125f → 5th unit area 125e, 7th unit area 125g → 6th unit area 125f, 8th unit area 125h → 7th unit area 125g, etc. After shifting, clear the 8th unit area 125h by "0".

After that, after executing the effect determination process for determining the content of the game rounding effect (step S1106), the effect command corresponding to the result of the effect determination process is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1107). .. The display-side MPU 92 starts the current game rounding effect on the symbol display device 41 according to the content of the effect command.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process of step S1106. In the effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the display change effect flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1201). The display change effect flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the display change effect is executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. As described above, in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, the number of hold unit image GRs corresponding to the total number of hold information on the special figure side held and stored in the hold area 103 is displayed. The display change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of one or more reserved unit image GRs in a situation where the game rounding effect is being executed. When "1" is set in the display change effect flag (step S1201: YES), the display change effect start process is executed (step S1202). The process of starting the display change effect will be described in detail later.

When "1" is not set in the display change effect flag (step S1201: NO), the final effect is set on condition that the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S1203: YES). The process is executed (step S1204). The definite effect is an effect that suggests that a jackpot result will occur in the current game times before the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends and the stop result is displayed in the game rounds effect. The setting process of the final effect will be described in detail later.

When the process of step S1202 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1204 is executed, other effect determination processes are executed (step S1205). In the other effect determination process, the content of the effect other than the display change effect and the final effect is determined. In this case, if the display continuation period corresponds to the predetermined reach, it is determined to execute the predetermined reach as the reach display, and the information corresponding to the predetermined reach is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, if the display continuation period corresponds to the reach display other than the predetermined reach, it is determined to execute the effect other than the predetermined reach as the reach display, and the corresponding information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, whether or not to execute the notice display is determined by lottery, and if the notice display is executed and won, the information corresponding to the type of notice display selected in the lottery is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. ..

After that, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1206). In the stop symbol determination process, the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game rounding effect is determined. The stop symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

After that, the effect execution table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the processing results of steps S1201 to S1206 is read from the sound / light side ROM 83 to the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1207). Information for controlling the execution of the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54 is set in the effect execution table over the entire game rounding effect. Specifically, a large number of pointer information is set to be serial numbers, and light emission data for causing the display light emitting unit 53 to perform light emission effect corresponding to each pointer information and sound output to the speaker unit 54. A combination of sound output data for producing an effect is set. Then, when the update timing is reached, the pointer information is updated, and the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are performed by using the data set corresponding to the updated pointer information. conduct.

The sound / light side MPU 82 controls the execution of the effect according to the effect execution table, so that the display light emitting unit 53 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the current game rotation effect, and the speaker unit 54 performs the current game rotation effect. Have the sound output effect corresponding to the effect performed. In this case, when the display change effect is executed in the game rounding effect this time, the light emission effect corresponding to the display change effect is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 at the execution timing of the display change effect, and is displayed. At the execution timing of the change effect, the sound output effect corresponding to the display change effect is performed by the speaker unit 54. Further, when the final effect (normal final effect or consecutive villa final effect) is executed in the game rounding effect this time, the light emission effect corresponding to the final effect is transmitted to the display light emitting unit 53 at the execution timing of the final effect. At the same time, the sound output effect corresponding to the final effect is performed by the speaker unit 54 at the execution timing of the final effect. Further, when the predetermined reach is executed in the game rounding effect this time, the light emitting effect corresponding to the predetermined reach is performed by the display light emitting unit 53 at the execution timing of the predetermined reach, and the execution timing of the predetermined reach is performed. In, the sound output effect corresponding to the predetermined reach is performed by the speaker unit 54.

In step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20), the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table read in step S1207 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92. The display-side MPU 92 reads the display-side effect execution table corresponding to the effect-effect command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Information for controlling the execution of the display effect on the symbol display device 41 is set in the display side effect execution table over the entire game round effect. Specifically, a large number of pointer information is set to be serial numbers, and a drawing list is set to cause the symbol display device 41 to perform a display effect corresponding to each pointer information. Then, when the update timing comes, the pointer information is updated, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed by giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 95 using the drawing list set corresponding to the updated pointer information. I do.

By controlling the execution of the display effect according to the display side effect execution table, the display side MPU 92 causes the symbol display device 41 to perform the display effect corresponding to the current game rotation effect. In this case, when the display change effect is executed in the game rounding effect, the display change effect is performed by the symbol display device 41 at the execution timing of the display change effect. Further, when the final effect (normal final effect or consecutive villa final effect) is executed in the game rounding effect this time, the display effect corresponding to the final effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the execution timing of the final effect. Will be done. Further, when the predetermined reach is executed in the game rounding effect this time, the display effect corresponding to the predetermined reach is performed by the symbol display device 41 at the execution timing of the predetermined reach.

Returning to the explanation of the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20), when the game round effect is being executed (step S1101: YES), "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84. (Step S1108: YES), the display change effect processing is executed (step S1109). The process for displaying change effect will be described in detail later. Further, the update process is executed (step S1110). In the update process, when the current game rounding effect is started, a process for advancing the effect according to the effect execution table read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21) is executed. do. If the effect execution table is changed in step S1109, a process for advancing the effect is executed according to the changed effect execution table. After that, in steps S1111 to S1115, the process for ending the display change effect is executed. The process for ending the display change effect will be described in detail later.

<Display change effect>
Next, the display change effect will be described.

The display change effect is executed as a kind of hold effect. The hold effect is a predetermined situation stored in the hold area 103 in a situation where the game round cannot be newly started (a situation in which the game round is being executed or an open / close execution mode is being executed). This is an effect in which the notification corresponding to the determination result when the reserved information on the special figure side is the target of the pass / fail determination is executed. In the pachinko machine 10, the hold effect is executed in a manner of clearly indicating the special figure side hold information that is the execution target of the hold effect. Specifically, the hold effect is executed by using the hold unit image GR displayed in the hold display area 41a set at the lower part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41.

FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the hold effect executed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 22B is a display of the hold unit image GR in the hold effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the holding display area 41a set at the lower part of the display surface of the symbol display device 41 has the same number of holding units as the number of holding information on the special figure side held and stored in the holding area 103. Image GR is displayed side by side. In the case of FIG. 22A, since eight special figure side hold information is reserved and stored in the hold area 103, eight hold unit image GRs are displayed in the hold display area 41a. Of the plurality of hold unit image GRs displayed in the hold display area 41a, the hold unit image GR displayed on the leftmost side corresponds to the special figure side hold information having the earliest digestion order and is directed to the right side. The display order of the hold unit image GR corresponds to the digestion order of the hold information on the special drawing side.

In the hold effect, the degree of expectation that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR corresponds to the jackpot result is notified according to the display mode of the hold unit image GR. A plurality of types of display modes of the hold unit image GR in the hold effect are set. The display mode of these reserved unit image GRs is different by changing the display color of the reserved unit image GR. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, as the display mode of the hold unit image GR, the hold unit image GR is displayed in "white" and the hold unit image GR is displayed in "blue". The display mode to be displayed, the display mode in which the hold unit image GR is displayed in "yellow", the display mode in which the hold unit image GR is displayed in "green", and the display mode in which the hold unit image GR is displayed in "red". There is a display mode and a display mode in which the reserved unit image GR is displayed in "rainbow color".

When the special figure side hold information whose display mode of the hold unit image GR is "white" is the start target of the game round, the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is 5%, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR is When the special figure side hold information that is "blue" is the start target of the game round, the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is 10%, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR is "yellow". When the hold information is the start target of the game round, the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is 15%, and the special figure side hold information whose display mode of the hold unit image GR is "green" is the start target of the game round. In the case of, the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is 20%, and when the special figure side hold information whose display mode of the hold unit image GR is "red" is the start target of the game round, the jackpot result When the expected degree of occurrence of the game is 50% and the reserved information on the special figure side whose display mode of the reserved unit image GR is "rainbow color" is the start target of the game round, the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is 100. It becomes%. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the hold unit image GR has a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher.

When the special figure side hold information in which the hold unit image GR is displayed in a “yellow” or higher display mode is the target for starting the game round, the reach display is surely generated in the game round production. Therefore, when the player confirms that the hold unit image GR having the display mode of "yellow" or higher exists, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR is the target for starting the game round. If it becomes, you will be confident that the reach display will occur and you will raise your expectations. Of the above display modes, the "white" display mode corresponds to the display mode in the situation where the hold effect is not executed, and the other display modes correspond to the display mode in the situation where the hold effect is executed. ..

In the case of FIG. 22A, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR in which the digestion order of the game rounds is the first, the second, the fourth, the sixth, and the eighth is "white", and the third reserved unit. The display mode of the image GR is "blue", the display mode of the fifth hold unit image GR is "yellow", and the display mode of the seventh hold unit image GR is "red". There is. In this way, even if the hold unit image GR that is already the hold effect execution target exists, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is the hold effect execution target. Can be. As a result, a plurality of hold unit image GRs can be executed targets of the hold unit image GR at the same time, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the hold unit image GR.

If the hold unit image GR that is already the execution target of the hold effect exists, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is not the execution target of the hold effect. May be. Further, the type of the display mode of the hold effect is not limited to the configuration in which the type of the display mode is distinguished by the display color, and the type of the display mode may be distinguished by the shape of the hold unit image GR. The type of display mode may be distinguished by the combination of display color and shape. Further, the number of types of display modes of the hold effect may be less than or more than 6 types. Further, the relationship between the display mode of the hold effect and the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is not limited to the above.

The display change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold unit image GR as described above from the time when the hold unit image GR is displayed on the symbol display device 41 until it is not displayed. In this case, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is changed so that the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is higher than the current one, and the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is higher than the current one. It is performed so as not to have a display mode with a low expectation. Further, the display mode of the hold unit image GR may be changed only for one hold unit image GR in one game, or may be changed for a plurality of hold unit image GRs. be.

23 (a) to 23 (h) and 24 (a) to 24 (h) are explanatory views for explaining how the display change effect is executed. First, a case where the special drawing side hold information is not newly acquired while the display change effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 23A, as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, since five special figure side hold information is reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, five hold unit image GRs are stored in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed. The display mode of these five reserved unit image GRs is "white", which is the least expected to generate a jackpot result.

When a game round is started in a situation where five special figure side hold information is held and stored, a short period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is not selected as the display continuation period of the game round. Even if the display change effect is executed, the display change effect is not executed in the game times for which a short period is selected as the display continuation period. In this case, since the short period is not selected as the display continuation period of the game times as described above, the display change effect is started when the game times effect is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 23A, when the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, the display of the display change suggestion image CH1 is started. The display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed at a position above the hold display area 41a in the lower part of the symbol display device 41. Then, the hold unit image GR side corresponding to the special figure side hold information in which the digestion order of the game times is early is moved and displayed from the hold unit image GR side corresponding to the special figure side hold information in which the digestion order of the game times is late. .. Specifically, at the timing when the display of the display change suggestion image CH1 is started, the display change suggestion is performed at the position above the leftmost hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information having the earliest digestion order of the game times. Image CH1 is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed so as to move to the right along the parallel arrangement direction of the reserved unit image GR.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the third special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR1, and the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the display mode of "change" which is the initial display mode to the display mode of "change?" The display mode is changed. However, the display mode of the third reserved unit image GR1 is not changed from "white". The display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode in the stopped display state, and after holding the changeable display mode for 1 second, it returns to the initial display mode again and then moves to the right. Resume the movement of.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the fifth special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR2. Then, in accordance with the change in the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1, the display mode of the fifth reserved unit image GR1 is the degree of expectation of the jackpot result one step higher than the “white” to the “white”. It is changed to "blue". The display change suggestion image CH1 is not displayed on the symbol display device 41 after the changeability display mode is held for 1 second in the stopped display situation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (d), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information held and stored in the hold area 103, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of the current game round, so that the special figure side hold information is held and stored. The number of reserved information on the special map side is four. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR1 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the third in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the second. In the game round, the hold unit image GR2 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fifth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth. The display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR2 is the same "blue" as the display mode of the fifth hold unit image GR1 in the previous game round, and the other hold unit image GR is displayed. The aspect is "white".

If the game round is started in a situation where the four special figure side hold information is held and stored, a short period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is not selected as the display continuation period of the game round. Therefore, when the game rounding effect is started, the display change effect is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), when the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, the display of the display change suggestion image CH1 is started.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the second special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. 23 (f). The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR1. However, the display mode of the second reserved unit image GR1 is not changed from "white" as in the previous game rounding effect. The display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode in the stopped display state, and after holding the changeable display mode for 1 second, it returns to the initial display mode again and then moves to the right. Resume the movement of.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the fourth special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. 23 (g). The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR2. However, the display mode of the fourth reserved unit image GR2 is not changed from "blue" unlike the previous game rounding effect. The display change suggestion image CH1 is not displayed on the symbol display device 41 after the changeability display mode is held for 1 second in the stopped display situation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (h), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

When the display change effect is performed as described above, the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed so as to move along the hold unit image GR displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Then, when the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode in the situation where the display change suggestion image CH1 is stopped and displayed above the predetermined hold unit image GR, the display mode of the predetermined hold unit image GR is further changed. It is suggested that the display mode may be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is high. In response to this suggestion, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the subject of the suggestion may or may not be changed. As a result, the player first expects that the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode, and at the same time, the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target due to the change in the display mode. It is expected that the display mode will be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher.

The above suggestion may be given to a plurality of reserved unit image GRs in one game rounding effect. In this case, the above suggestions are not given to the plurality of reserved unit images GR at the same time, but are sequentially given so that the execution timings are different. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a long time that the display mode of the reserved unit image GR is changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher.

The display change effect is continuously executed in a plurality of consecutive game rounds effects. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display change effect over a plurality of game times.

When the display change effect is continuously executed in a plurality of game rounds effects, the same hold unit image GR is the suggestion target for changing the display mode. As a result, the target to be noted in the situation where the display change effect is being executed becomes easy for the player to understand. In addition, when the display mode of the hold unit image GR whose order of starting the game round is on the rear side in the one-game round production is changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher. , It is possible to expect further changes in the display mode before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR becomes the start target of the game round.

Next, a case where the special drawing side hold information is newly acquired while the display change effect is being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 24A, as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, since the five special figure side hold information is reserved and stored in the hold area 103, the five hold unit image GRs are displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. Of these five reserved unit image GRs, the reserved unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side reserved information whose digestion order is the first to the fourth (that is, the reserved unit image GR from the left to the fourth) is the display mode thereof. Is "white", which is the lowest expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result, while the holding unit image GR3 corresponding to the special drawing side holding information in the fifth digestion order (that is, the holding unit image GR3 at the right end). The display mode is "blue", which is the second lowest expectation of the occurrence of a jackpot result.

When a game round is started in a situation where five special figure side hold information is held and stored, a short period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is not selected as the display continuation period of the game round. Therefore, when the game rounding effect is started, the display change effect is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, the display of the display change suggestion image CH1 is started.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the fifth special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. 24 (b). The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR3. Then, in accordance with the change in the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1, the display mode of the fifth reserved unit image GR3 is expected to generate a jackpot result one step higher than the “blue” to the “blue”. It is changed to "yellow". The display change suggestion image CH1 is not displayed on the symbol display device 41 after the changeability display mode is held for 1 second in the stopped display situation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information held and stored in the hold area 103, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of the current game round, so that the special figure side hold information is held and stored. The number of reserved information on the special map side is four. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR3 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fifth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth. The display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR3 is "yellow", which is the same as the display mode of the fifth hold unit image GR3 in the previous game round, and the other hold unit image GR is displayed. The aspect is "white".

If the game round is started in a situation where the four special figure side hold information is held and stored, a short period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is not selected as the display continuation period of the game round. Therefore, when the game rounding effect is started, the display change effect is started. That is, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), when the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started, the display of the display change suggestion image CH1 is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (e), the display change suggestion image CH1 is positioned above the fourth reserved unit image GR3 in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued. The special figure side hold information is newly acquired at the timing before the arrival timing. Therefore, in the hold display area 41a, the fifth hold unit image GR4 is displayed on the right side of the fourth hold unit image GR3. The display mode of the fifth reserved unit image GR4 is "white", which is the least expected to generate a jackpot result.

Here, when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired while the display change effect is being executed, the newly acquired special figure side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the predetermined reach. If, the hold unit image GR4 corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information can be a suggestion target of the possibility of changing the display mode in the display change effect. Then, when the hold unit image GR4 corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information becomes a suggestion target of the changeability of the display mode in the display change effect, the display mode may be changed until then. One reserved unit image GR3, which has been a suggestion target, becomes a dummy target. Although the hold unit image GR3 that is the dummy target is continued as the suggestion target, the display mode is not actually changed, and the display mode is changed only for the hold unit image GR4 that is the suggestion target of the possibility of change. You will get it.

It should be noted that the holding unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special drawing side holding information may change the display mode in the situation where a plurality of holding unit image GRs have already been suggested to change the display mode. When it becomes the suggestion target of, one of the multiple hold unit image GRs that has been the suggestion target of the possibility of changing the display mode has the latest hold as the start target of the game round. The unit image GR is a dummy target, while the other reserved unit image GRs are excluded from both the suggestion target and the dummy target.

Further, in the situation where the display change effect is being executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information may not be the suggestion target of the changeability. In this case, the display change effect is continued without changing the suggestion target of the changeability.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 becomes the fourth special symbol side hold information in the digestion order of the game times as shown in FIG. The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the corresponding hold unit image GR3. However, the display mode of the fourth reserved unit image GR1 is not changed from "yellow". The display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode in the stopped display state, and after holding the changeable display mode for 1 second, it returns to the initial display mode again and then moves to the right. Resume the movement of.

After that, in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued, the display change suggestion image CH1 is the special symbol side hold information in which the digestion order of the game times is the fifth as shown in FIG. That is, the display mode is stopped and displayed at the upper position of the hold unit image GR4 corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information, and the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode. To. Then, in accordance with the change in the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1, the display mode of the fifth reserved unit image GR4 is expected to generate a jackpot result two steps higher than the “white” to the “white”. Is changed to "yellow". The display change suggestion image CH1 is not displayed on the symbol display device 41 after the changeability display mode is held for 1 second in the stopped display situation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 24 (h), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

If the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the display change effect is executed as described above, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information may be changed. Can be a suggestion target. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display change effect. Further, even if the execution content of the display change effect up to that point is not preferable for the player, the execution content of the display change effect may be preferable for the player depending on the content of the special figure side hold information acquired after that. You will get it. This makes it possible to suitably maintain the player's attention to the display change effect. In addition, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of hold unit image GRs are treated as targets for executing the display change effect in one game turn effect.

Hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information on condition that the newly acquired special figure side hold information corresponds to the big hit result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach in the situation where the display change effect is executed. Can be set as a suggestion target for changeability. Therefore, when the player newly acquires the special figure side hold information in the situation where the display change effect is being executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is changed. It is expected that it will be set as a suggestion target of possibility.

In the situation where the display change effect is being executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is set as the suggestion target of the changeability, and the suggestion of the changeability until then. When the display mode of the hold unit image GR set as the target is "blue" or higher, the display mode may be changed with respect to the hold unit image GR newly set as the suggestion target of changeability. When the suggestion is made first, it is changed to the display mode. In this case, even if the display mode of the hold unit image GR that has been set as the suggestion target of changeability is "yellow" or higher, the hold unit image GR newly set as the suggestion target of changeability is set. When the suggestion of the possibility of changing the display mode is made for the first time, the display mode is changed. As a result, when the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is set as a suggestion target of the possibility of change, the player's expectation for the display change effect up to that point. It is possible to maintain the feeling.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the display change effect will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a hold effect setting process executed in step S611 in the hold command reception process (FIG. 15). Since the hold command reception process is activated when the first hold command or the second hold command is received from the main MPU 62 as described above, the hold effect setting process is also the first hold command or the hold command setting process from the main MPU 62. It is started when the second hold command is received.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84, it is determined whether or not the display change effect is executed (step S1301). If a negative determination is made in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the first hold command or the second hold command received this time is the special figure side hold information that results in a big hit in the high probability mode. Determination (step S1302). Specifically, of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side holding area 125, the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time are high in the hit / fail area at the time of high probability. It is determined whether or not the jackpot information at the time of probability is set.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S1301, is the winning / failing lottery mode in the case where the special drawing side holding information corresponding to the first holding command or the second holding command received this time triggers the start of the game round is the high probability mode? It is determined whether or not (step S1303). In the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode occurs as described above, the high-probability mode is always set after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the high-probability mode is performed eight times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the eighth game round is completed continuously until the game round is exhausted, the low probability mode is set. The sound light side MPU 82 is the special figure side hold information that has already been acquired, and is a special feature that triggers the start of the game round before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the first hold command or the second hold command received this time. Whether or not the hold information on the drawing side corresponds to the jackpot result can be specified by referring to the hold area 125 on the production side, and the number of game times digested after the opening / closing execution mode ends can be measured. It has become. Therefore, the sound / light side MPU 82 can determine whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode when the current special drawing side holding information triggers the start of the game round.

In detail, if the special figure side hold information that triggers the start of the game round results in a big hit before the special figure side hold information acquired this time, the maximum number of special figure side hold information to be held and stored. In the configuration where there are eight, the high-probability mode continues until the eight game rounds are exhausted after the open / close execution mode ends as described above, so the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the trigger for the start of the game rounds. In this case, the winning / failing lottery mode is a high probability mode. In addition, if the special figure side hold information that triggers the start of the game round does not result in a big hit before the special figure side hold information acquired this time, it is acquired this time if the current win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. The winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode when the reserved information on the special drawing side triggers the start of the game round. In addition, when the current winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the special figure side hold information acquired this time within the range of the number of remaining game times until the high probability mode ends is the target for starting the game times. In this case, the winning / failing lottery mode when the special figure side hold information acquired this time triggers the start of the game round is the high-probability mode, while the number of remaining game rounds until the high-probability mode ends. If the special figure side hold information acquired this time is not the target for starting the game round within the range, and the special figure side hold information acquired this time triggers the start of the game round, the winning / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. ..

When a negative judgment is made in step S1302, or when a negative judgment is made in step S1303, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the first hold command or the second hold command received this time becomes a big hit result in the low probability mode. It is determined whether or not the information is reserved on the special figure side (step S1304). Specifically, among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side holding area 125, the hit / fail area at the time of low probability in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time is low. It is determined whether or not the jackpot information at the time of probability is set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, the lottery table at the time of a big hit is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1305). FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining various lottery tables related to the hold effect. As shown in FIG. 26 (a), all of "white", "blue", "yellow", "green", "red" and "rainbow color" are set as display modes for selection in the lottery table at the time of big hit. Has been done. Of these, the selection probability of "white", "blue", "yellow" and "green" is set to 20%, and the selection probability of "red" is set to 15%, which is "rainbow color". The selection probability is set to 5%.

When a negative determination is made in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the first hold command or the second hold command received this time is the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach. (Step S1306). As already described, the predetermined reach is set as a reach with a higher expectation of occurrence of a jackpot result than in the case of a specific reach, and as the predetermined reach, for example, a reach effect by a predetermined character is executed. Specifically, in step S1306, among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side holding area 125, the presence or absence of a predetermined reach in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined reach information is set in.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, the lottery table at the time of predetermined reach is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1307). As shown in FIG. 26A, "white", "blue", "yellow", "green", and "red" are set as display modes for selection in the lottery table at the time of predetermined reach. Of these, the selection probability of "white", "blue" and "green" is set to 20%, the selection probability of "yellow" is set to 30%, and the selection probability of "red" is 10%. Is set to.

When a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the first hold command or the second hold command received this time is the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of non-predetermined reach. Determination (step S1308). Specifically, among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side holding area 125, the non-predetermined reach presence / absence area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time is not included. It is determined whether or not the predetermined reach information is set.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1308, the lottery table at the time of non-predetermined reach is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1309). As shown in FIG. 26A, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are set as display modes of the selection target in the lottery table at the time of non-predetermined reach. Of these, the selection probability of "white" is set to 80%, the selection probability of "blue" is set to 10%, and the selection probability of "yellow" is set to 10%.

If a negative determination is made in step S1308, the lottery table when reach is not generated is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1310). As shown in FIG. 26A, "white" and "blue" are set as display modes of the selection target in the lottery table when reach does not occur. Of these, the selection probability of "white" is set to 90%, and the selection probability of "blue" is set to 10%.

After reading the lottery table in any one of step S1305, step S1307, step S1309 and step S1310, the execution lottery process of the hold effect is executed (step S1311). Execution of the hold effect In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the hold effect that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is used in steps S1305, S1307, step S1309, and step S1310. The display mode of the hold unit image GR to be executed is selected by collating with the lottery table read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 by any of the above.

When a display mode other than "white" is selected in the execution lottery process of the hold effect (step S1312: YES), the information corresponding to the selected display mode is provided as the execution winner of the hold effect in the effect side hold area 125. Of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the above, it is set to the hold display area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time (step S1313). On the other hand, when the display mode of "white" is selected in the execution lottery process of the hold effect (step S1312: NO), the information corresponding to the display mode of "white" is used for holding the effect side as the execution of the hold effect is not performed. Of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the area 125, it is set as the hold display area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time (step S1314).

Further, even when "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the information corresponding to the "white" display mode is transmitted to the effect side holding area 125. Of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the above, it is set to the hold display area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time (step S1314). As a result, when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the display change effect should be executed, the display of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information is started. The display mode in the above is "white", which has the lowest expectation of a jackpot result.

When the process of step S1313 or step S1314 is executed, the hold display setting process is executed (step S1315). In the hold display setting process, a command corresponding to the information of the display mode set in the hold display area of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h in the hold display area 125 on the effect side is transmitted to the display control device 90. As a result, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the information of the display mode set in the hold display areas of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h in the hold display area 125 on the effect side is set in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. In this case, the special figure side hold information for which a display mode other than "white" is selected in the hold effect setting process is selected at the timing when the display of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information is started. The display mode is started, and the special figure side hold information for which the "white" display mode is selected is "white" at the timing when the display of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information is started. The display according to the display mode of is started. After that, the setting process of the display change effect is executed (step S1316).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the display change effect.

In the display change effect setting process, when "1" is not set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1401: NO), a process for setting the display change effect to be executed is executed. .. Specifically, as a process for setting the display change effect to be executed, first, by referring to the effect side hold area 125, three or more special figure sides in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 It is determined whether or not the hold information is held and stored (step S1402). If three or more special drawing side hold information is not stored on hold, a negative determination is made in step S1402, so that the display change effect is not set to be executed. When the display change effect is set to be executed by setting the display change effect to be executed on the condition that a predetermined number of hold information on the special figure side is held and stored. It is possible to execute the display change effect over a plurality of game times.

When three or more special figure side hold information is reserved and stored (step S1402: YES), by referring to the production side hold area 125, the game times are preceded by the special figure side hold information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result exists in the special figure side hold information to be started (step S1403). When determining whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach exists, the special figure side acquired this time out of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side hold area 125. Prior to the hold information, the area with or without a predetermined reach in the area corresponding to the special figure side hold information to be started of the game round is referred to. In addition, when determining whether or not there is special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the production side hold information in order from the special figure side hold information on the side that is digested as the start target of the game round earlier. The hit / fail area at the time of high probability or the hit / miss area at the time of low probability in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the use area 125 is referred to. In this reference, if the current winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning / failing area at the time of low probability is referred to. In addition, if the current winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode, the winning / losing lottery mode is specified when the special figure side hold information to be referred to is the starting target of the game round, and if it is a high-probability mode, the probability is high. If it is a low probability mode, the hit / miss area at the time of low probability is referred to.

When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result exists in the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information acquired this time. Does not set the state in which the display change effect is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S1403. As a result, in the situation where the display change effect is set to be executed, the special figure side hold information different from the special figure side hold information which is the suggestion target of the change possibility by the display change effect is the start target. It is possible to prevent a predetermined reach and a jackpot result from occurring in the game times.

When the special figure side hold information that is the target of the start of the game round does not have the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result before the special figure side hold information acquired this time ( Step S1403: NO), by referring to the effect side hold area 125, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information for which the game round is started before the special figure side hold information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not there is an item whose expected degree of occurrence of a jackpot result is "blue" or higher (step S1404). Specifically, among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side holding area 125, the special drawing side holding information that is the target of starting the game round is set prior to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not information corresponding to a display mode other than "white" is stored in the hold display area in the corresponding area.

There is a hold unit image GR that corresponds to the special figure side hold information that is the target of the start of the game round before the special figure side hold information acquired this time, and the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is "blue" or higher. If this is the case, the affirmative determination is made in step S1404, so that the display change effect is not set to be executed. As a result, in a situation where a hold unit image GR having a display mode of "blue" or higher already exists, a display change effect is not started with another hold unit image GR as a suggestion target of changeability. It becomes possible to.

There is a hold unit image GR that corresponds to the special figure side hold information that is the target of the start of the game round before the special figure side hold information acquired this time, and the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is "blue" or higher. If not (step S1404: NO), the hold display area in the area corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side hold area 125 is "white". By determining whether or not the information corresponding to the display mode of "blue" or "blue" is stored, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time is "white" or "white". It is determined whether or not the image is "blue" (step S1405). If a negative determination is made in step S1405, the display change effect is not set to be executed. As a result, a display change effect is executed in which the reserved information on the special figure side, in which the display of the reserved unit image GR is started by the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is "yellow" or higher, is suggested as the possibility of change. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

When the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time is "white" or "blue" (step S1405: YES), the execution lottery table of the display change effect is displayed from the sound light side ROM 83. Read to the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1406). After that, the execution lottery process of the display change effect is executed (step S1407). Execution of display change effect In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for display change effect that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is transferred to the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1406. Check against the execution lottery table of the read display change effect.

FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the execution lottery table for the display change effect. As shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot result or the occurrence of a predetermined reach, the probability of winning the execution of the display change effect is 50%. Yes, if the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of non-predetermined reach, the probability of winning the execution of the display change effect is 25%, and the special figure side hold information acquired this time is When the non-occurrence of the reach display is supported, the probability of winning the execution of the display change effect is 10%. When other special figure side hold information is acquired with the probability of winning the execution of the display change effect when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach is acquired in this way. By setting the value higher than the above, it is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of a jackpot result or the occurrence of a predetermined reach when the display change effect is executed. In addition, the probability that the display change effect will be executed when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of any of the reach displays is acquired is the special figure side hold information corresponding to the non-occurrence of the reach display. By setting the value higher than the case where is acquired, it is possible to make the player expect the occurrence of the reach display when the display change effect is executed. In addition, it is limited to the configuration in which the probability of winning the execution of the display change effect is the same for the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result and the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach. In this case, the probability of the former may be set higher than the probability of the latter.

When the execution of the display change effect is won (step S1408: YES), "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1409). After that, the number of special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 is specified by referring to the effect side hold area 125, and the number of the specified special figure side hold information is specified. Information is set in the display change effect counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1410). The display change effect counter is a counter for specifying the end trigger of the state by the sound / light side MPU 82 when the state is set to execute the display change effect. The value of the display change effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game round is completed in a situation where "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84.

After that, the scenario lottery table reading process is executed (step S1411). The display change effect can be executed over a plurality of game times, and the display change effect is repeatedly executed for the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Then, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the target of suggestion of changeability can be changed to a predetermined display mode. The rough content of the execution content of this display change effect is determined by the scenario data stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 83. A plurality of types of scenario data are stored in the sound / light side ROM 83, and when the display change effect is set to be executed, the scenario data to be referred to is determined by lottery. This makes it possible to diversify the execution contents of the display change effect.

The contents of the scenario data will be explained in more detail. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the scenario data group 131 stored in advance in the sound / light side ROM 83.

As described above, the state in which the display change effect is executed is set in the situation where three or more pieces of special drawing side hold information are held and stored. Therefore, in the scenario data group 131, scenario data groups 132 to 137 corresponding to the number of pieces corresponding to the number of each of the three or more special figure side reserved information are prepared. Specifically, the scenario data group 132 for three pieces is set to the state where the display change effect is executed in the situation where three pieces of special figure side hold information are held and stored. Is remembered in. Further, the scenario data group 133 for 4 pieces is stored in the sound / light side ROM 83 in correspondence with the setting in which the display change effect is executed in the situation where 4 pieces of special figure side hold information are stored. ing. Further, the scenario data group 134 for 5 pieces is stored in the sound / light side ROM 83 in correspondence with the setting in which the display change effect is executed in the situation where 5 pieces of special figure side hold information are stored. ing. In addition, the scenario data group 135 for 6 pieces is stored in the sound / light side ROM 83 in correspondence with the setting in which the display change effect is executed in the situation where 6 pieces of special figure side hold information are stored. ing. Further, the scenario data group 136 for 7 pieces is stored in the sound / light side ROM 83 in correspondence with the setting in which the display change effect is executed in the situation where 7 pieces of special figure side hold information are stored. ing. Further, the scenario data group 137 for 8 pieces is stored in the sound / light side ROM 83 in correspondence with the setting in which the display change effect is executed in the situation where 8 pieces of special figure side hold information are stored. ing.

A plurality of scenario data are included in the scenario data groups 132 to 137 corresponding to each number. The number of included scenario data differs depending on the type of scenario data group 132 to 137 corresponding to the number, and the scenario data group 132 to 137 having a relatively large number of corresponding reserved information on the special figure side. Compared to the scenario data groups 132 to 137, which have a relatively small number of data, the number of included scenario data is large. The larger the number of reserved information on the special figure side, the larger the number of scenario data, so the state in which the display change effect is executed is maintained. As the number of game times increases, the execution content of the display change effect is diversified. Is possible.

In the state where the display change effect is executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed is the suggestion target of the possibility of change. In addition to that, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the start target of the game round before the special figure side hold information can be the execution target of the effect by the display change effect as a dummy target. In this case, the display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability, the presence / absence of the dummy target, and the type of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target if there is a dummy target. , And the display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR to be a dummy target is specified in the scenario data. Since the larger the number of reserved information on the special figure side, the larger the number of scenario data, it is possible to set more types of reserved unit image GR to be dummy targets as the number of reserved information on the special figure side increases. Become.

The scenario data will be described by taking the scenario data group 134 for five as an example. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the scenario data included in the scenario data group 134 for five pieces.

The scenario data group 134 for 5 pieces includes the first scenario data for 5 pieces to the 26th scenario data for 5 pieces. In each scenario data, a combination of information on a display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR, which is a suggestion target of changeability, and information on a dummy target is set. The hold unit image GR to which the possibility of change is suggested is the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed as described above. Information on the display mode that the reserved unit image GR can finally reach is "no change", "white → blue", "white → yellow", "white → green", "white → red", "white". There are "rainbow color", "blue → yellow", "blue → green", "blue → red" and "blue → rainbow color".

"No change" corresponds to the fact that even if the display change effect is set to be executed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, does not occur. That is, although the display change effect using the display change suggestion image CH1 (see FIGS. 23 and 24) is executed, the display change effect is executed in the display mode of the hold unit image GR which is the suggestion target of the changeability. It will not change from the start to the end of the state. This "no change" can be selected regardless of whether the display mode of the hold unit image GR whose changeability is suggested is "white" or "blue" at the start timing of the hold display.

For "white → blue", "white → yellow", "white → green", "white → red", and "white → rainbow", the display mode of the pending unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is pending. Can be selected if it is "white" at the start timing of. And, "white → blue" corresponds to the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is "blue", and "white → yellow" can be changed. It corresponds to the fact that the display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR that is the target of sexual suggestion is "yellow", and "white → green" is the reserved unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Corresponds to the fact that the display mode that can be finally reached is "green", and "white → red" is the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability. It corresponds to "red", and "white → rainbow color" corresponds to the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is "rainbow color". is doing.

For "blue → yellow", "blue → green", "blue → red" and "blue → rainbow", the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is "blue" at the start timing of the hold display. Can be selected if. And, "blue → yellow" corresponds to the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is "yellow", and "blue → green" can be changed. The display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR that is the target of sexual suggestion corresponds to "green", and "blue → red" is the reserved unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Corresponds to the finally reachable display mode of "red", and "blue → rainbow color" is the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Corresponds to the "rainbow color".

As described above, the hold unit image GR, which is a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is “yellow” or higher at the start timing of the hold display, does not trigger the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed. Therefore, as information on the display mode that the reserved unit image GR can finally reach, a pattern in which the display mode at the start is "yellow", "green", "red", and "rainbow color" is not set. .. This makes it possible to prevent the types of scenario data from becoming excessively large.

As information about the dummy target, "No target", "The previous hold display changes to blue", "The previous hold display changes to blue", and "1 to 3 previous hold display changes to blue". "Change" exists. "No target" corresponds to the fact that the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target does not exist. However, the details will be changed by winning the dummy in the dummy target lottery process (step S1610) even if the scenario data corresponding to the fact that the dummy target does not exist is selected as described later. The hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the start target of the game round is set as the dummy target before the special figure side hold information that is the suggestion target of the possibility. Even if the hold unit image GR set in this case is the target for executing the effect by the display change suggestion image CH1, the display mode is not changed.

"The previous hold display changes to blue" corresponds to the special figure side hold information that is the start target of the game round two times before the special figure side hold information that is the suggestion target of changeability. It corresponds to the fact that the reserved unit image GR becomes a dummy target, and also corresponds to the fact that the display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR to be the dummy target is "blue". In addition, "the previous hold display changes to blue" means that the order in which the game is started is the previous special figure side hold information rather than the special figure side hold information that is the suggestion target of changeability. It corresponds to the corresponding holding unit image GR being a dummy target, and corresponding to the fact that the finally reachable display mode of the holding unit image GR to be a dummy target is "blue".

"The hold display of 1 to 3 pieces before changes to blue" means that the order of starting the game round is 1 to 3 before the special figure side hold information, which is the suggestion target of changeability, for a total of 3 pieces. The hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information corresponds to the dummy target, and the display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target is "blue". It corresponds to. This "1 to 3 previous hold display changes to blue" is a display mode that can be finally reached among the information on the display mode that the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability can finally be reached. Is set in association with the information of "rainbow color", and is not associated with other information. Therefore, in the state where the display change effect is executed, the three special figure sides that are the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed. Hold unit corresponding to each of the hold information When the display mode of the image GR changes from "white" to "blue", the hold unit corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the above setting. It is confirmed that the display mode of the image GR changes to "rainbow color". Then, it is confirmed that the reserved information on the special figure side of the reserved unit image GR whose display mode is "rainbow color" is a jackpot result. As a result, when the player is in a state where the display change effect is executed, the player starts the game round before the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed. It is expected that the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to each of the three target special figure side hold information changes from "white" to "blue". Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the display change effect.

In addition, as information about the dummy target, "1 to 3 previous hold display changes to blue" is set for 5 scenario data, 6 scenario data, 7 scenario data, and 8 It is scenario data for individual pieces, and is not set for scenario data for 3 pieces and scenario data for 4 pieces.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a reading process of the scenario lottery table executed in step S1411 in the setting process of the display change effect (FIG. 27).

First, it is determined whether or not the special figure side reserved information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S1501). Specifically, by referring to the production side hold area 125, the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result before the special figure side hold information acquired this time. When it is specified that the information is held, it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the target for starting the game round in the high probability mode. In addition, the current winning / losing lottery mode is a high-probability mode, and within the range of the remaining number of games in which the high-probability mode is continued, the game rounds triggered by the special figure side hold information acquired this time are executed. Even when the above is specified, it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the target for starting the game round in the high probability mode. On the other hand, if none of these situations apply, it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the target for starting the game round in the low probability mode. When it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the target for starting the game round in the high probability mode, it is acquired this time out of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side hold area 125. By referring to the hit / miss area at the time of high probability in the area corresponding to the special figure side hold information, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In addition, when it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time is the target for starting the game round in the low probability mode, it is acquired this time out of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the production side hold area 125. By referring to the hit / fail area at the time of low probability in the area corresponding to the special figure side hold information, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result.

When it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S1501: YES), the scenario data corresponding to the current hold number of the special figure side hold information is set as the selection target. Among the set scenario lottery tables, the scenario data in which the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability is one of "green", "red", and "rainbow color". The scenario lottery table set as the selection target is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1502).

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach (step S1503). In this determination, the presence / absence of a predetermined reach in the area corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 is referred to. When it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the predetermined reach (step S1503: YES), the scenario data corresponding to the current hold number of the special figure side hold information is set as the selection target. Among the set scenario lottery tables, scenario data whose display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is either "green" or "red" is set as the selection target. The scenario lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1504).

When a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of non-predetermined reach (step S1505). In this determination, the presence / absence of non-predetermined reach in the area corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 is referred to. When it is specified that the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of non-predetermined reach (step S1505: YES), the scenario data corresponding to the current hold number of the special figure side hold information is selected as the selection target. Of the set scenario lottery tables, the scenario data in which the information about the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is "no change" and the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability are finally set. A scenario lottery table in which scenario data whose reachable display mode is any of "blue", "yellow", and "green" is set as a selection target is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1506).

When a negative judgment is made in step S1505, the hold unit image that is the suggestion target of changeability in the scenario lottery table group in which the scenario data corresponding to the current hold number of the special figure side hold information is set as the selection target. Scenario data in which the information about GR is "no change" and scenario data in which the display mode that can be finally reached of the pending unit image GR that is the suggestion target of change is "blue" are set as selection targets. The lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1507).

Returning to the description of the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27), after executing the scenario lottery table reading process in step S1411, the scenario lottery process is executed (step S1412). In the scenario lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for scenario lottery that is periodically updated in the sound and light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1411 in the scenario lottery table. By collating with the above, the scenario data to be referred to is acquired from the scenario lottery table. After that, the storage process of the scenario data is executed (step S1413).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the storage process of the scenario data in step S1413.

First, it is determined whether or not the information regarding the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the scenario data acquired this time, is the information corresponding to the change in the display mode of the hold unit image GR (step S1601). If the information regarding the pending unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the scenario data, is information other than the information of "no change", an affirmative judgment is made in step S1601.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1601, the number of promotion stages is grasped (step S1602). Specifically, the display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability in the scenario data acquired this time is expected to be a jackpot result with respect to the current display mode of the hold unit image GR. Understand how many levels of display mode the degree is. For example, when the display mode that can be finally reached in the scenario data is "red" and the current display mode is "white", it is specified that there are four stages. Further, when the display mode that can be finally reached in the scenario data is "green" and the current display mode is "blue", it is specified that there are two stages. Then, the numerical information corresponding to the specified number of steps is set in the promotion target counter provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1603). That is, when it is specified that there are four stages as in the above example, "4" is set in the promotion target counter, and when it is specified that there are two stages as in the above example, "2" is set in the promotion target counter. To set.

After that, by determining whether or not information other than the "no target" information is set as the information regarding the dummy target in the scenario data acquired this time, whether or not the dummy target is set in the scenario data acquired this time. Is determined (step S1604). When the dummy target is set (step S1604: YES), it is determined whether or not the information for changing the plurality of reserved unit image GRs to "blue" is set as the information regarding the dummy target in the scenario data acquired this time. (Step S1605). Taking as an example the scenario data for 5 pieces selected when the number of hold pieces of the special figure side hold information is 5, the information about the dummy target is "the hold display 1 to 3 pieces before changes to blue". Determine if the information is set. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, "1" is set in the plurality of change flags provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1606). The multiple change flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 82 to specify that the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the plurality of dummy targets should be changed to "blue".

When a negative determination is made in step S1605, the order in which the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR set as the dummy target in the scenario data acquired this time is digested as the start target of the game round is grasped ( Step S1607). Taking as an example the scenario data for 5 pieces selected when the number of hold pieces of the special figure side hold information is 5, the information of "the hold display of 2 pieces before changes to blue" is used as the information about the dummy target. If it is set, "3" is specified as the digestion order, and if the information "the previous hold display changes to blue" is set as the information about the dummy target, "4" is specified as the digestion order. To identify. Then, the information of the specified digestion order is set in the dummy target counter provided in the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1608). The dummy target counter is a counter for specifying the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target on the sound / light side MPU 82. The value of the dummy target counter is decremented by 1 each time one game round is completed in a situation where "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84. After that, "1" is set in the dummy target flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1609). The dummy target flag is a flag for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 whether or not it is necessary to change the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target.

When the information of "no target" is set as the information regarding the dummy target in the scenario data acquired this time, it is assumed that the dummy target does not exist (step S1604: NO), and the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, the lottery process for the dummy target is executed. In the dummy target lottery process, the dummy target lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the dummy lottery that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the dummy target lottery table read out to the sound light side RAM 84. The probability of winning a dummy in the lottery process for a dummy is constant at 20%, but it is not limited to this, and it will be a dummy winning according to the content of the special drawing side reserved information acquired this time. The configurations may have different probabilities.

When a dummy is won in the dummy target lottery process (step S1611: YES), a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current number of reserved information on the special drawing side is set in the dummy target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step). S1612). That is, when the dummy is won in the lottery process of the dummy target, the order of starting the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information one before the special figure side hold information acquired this time. The hold unit image GR is a dummy target. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the dummy is won, the hold unit image GR that is the target of the dummy will be the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information acquired this time. It may be configured to be selected by lottery from the holding unit image GR corresponding to the holding information on the drawing side.

Next, the process of starting the display change effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. In addition, when the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84 is set to "1" in the effect determination process (FIG. 21), which is executed when the effect for game rounds is started, the display change effect start process is performed. Is executed in step S1202. That is, when a new game rotation effect is started in a state where the display change effect is executed, the display change effect start process is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not the display continuation period of the game times started this time is the display continuation period in which the display change effect can be executed (step S1701). As already explained, if a new start opportunity for a game round occurs in a situation where 8 hold information is stored, which is the maximum number of hold information on the special figure side, the hold information on the special figure side will be displayed for the game round due to the new start trigger. It is started in the situation where 7 pieces are held and stored. If both the jackpot result and the reach display do not occur in the game rounds due to this new start opportunity, the display continuation period of the game rounds is a short period of 1.5 seconds. On the other hand, except for the situation concerned, the display duration of the shortest game round is 10 seconds. When the display change effect is executed as the effect for the game round, the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed along the hold display area 41a in the situation where the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed as described above. The movement display is performed. The display change suggestion image CH1 changes its display mode from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode in a state where it is temporarily stopped above the predetermined holding unit image GR in the middle of the movement display. The change of the display mode is performed up to four times, and when the display mode is changed four times, the time required for the movement display of the display change suggestion image CH1 to be completed is 4 seconds. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the shortest display continuation period of the game times in the situation other than the short period, is selected as the display continuation period of the game times, until the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. When the period required for the game is 5 seconds and the display continuation period of the game times is longer than 10 seconds, the period required for the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed is 5 seconds or more. Therefore, if the display continuation period of the game times is a display continuation period other than 1.5 seconds, which is a short period, the display continuation period is such that the display change effect can be executed.

When the display continuation period of the game times is a short period (1.5 seconds) (step S1701: NO), the processing after step S1702 is terminated. That is, even if the display change effect is set to be executed, if the display continuation period of the game times is a short period (1.5 seconds), it is displayed in the game times effect of the game times. The change effect is not executed. In such a configuration, even if the state in which the display change effect is executed is set, the special figure side hold information is held and stored in the maximum number of 8 pieces each time the start trigger of the game round occurs thereafter. If both the jackpot result and the reach display do not occur, the display change effect is not executed as the game rounding effect. In addition, after the display change effect is set to be executed, the maximum number of reserved information on the special figure side is held before the reserved information on the special figure side that triggered the setting of the state becomes the start target of the game round. In the situation where 8 pieces are held and stored, both the game times in which the start opportunity occurs and neither the jackpot result nor the reach display occurs, and the game times other than the game times occur. In this case, in the former game round, the display change effect does not occur in the game round effect, while in the latter game round, the display change effect may occur in the game round effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display change effect from occurring in a situation where a sense of incongruity occurs when the display change effect occurs in relation to the display continuation period of the game times. Further, it is possible to limit the situation in which the display change effect is executed to the situation in which the symbol variation display is performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the player can determine whether or not the display change effect is executed. It is possible to clarify the object of interest.

When the display continuation period of the game times is not a short period (1.5 seconds) (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the scenario change flag provided in the sound light side RAM 84. (Step S1702). The scenario change flag sounds whether or not the special figure side hold information is newly set as the suggestion target of the possibility of change when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed. It is a flag for specifying by the optical side MPU 82. The details of the scenario change will be described later.

When a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is "0" (step S1706). As already explained, the promotion target counter is expected to generate a jackpot result with respect to the current display mode of the hold unit image GR whose display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is the current display mode of the hold unit image GR. It is a counter for specifying by the sound light side MPU 82 how many steps of the display mode is in the degree. When the value of the promotion target counter is "0", the display mode of the pending unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of changeability, does not change in the state where the display change effect is executed this time. Since the change of the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the possibility of change, has already been completed in the state where the display change effect of this time is executed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is the display change effect of this time. It means that the display mode is finally reachable in the state in which is executed. When the value of the promotion target counter is "0" (step S1706: YES), it is necessary to change the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability in the display change effect in the game rounding effect this time. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1715 without executing the processes of steps S1707 to S1714.

In this case, in the process of reading the effect execution table in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21), the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Although the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is not changed. The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect is on the sound side. Read to RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree in the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result, the changeability is possible. The hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target is not the target of the execution of the display change effect, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is less than the predetermined expectation in the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result. In this case, the display mode is not changed, but the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, may be configured to be the target of the display change effect. The predetermined degree of expectation may be "red" or "rainbow color".

When the value of the promotion target counter is 1 or more (step S1706: NO), the value set in the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is larger than the value set in the display change effect counter of the sound light side RAM 84. It is determined whether or not the value is large (step S1707). As already explained, the promotion target counter is expected to generate a jackpot result with respect to the current display mode of the hold unit image GR whose display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is the current display mode of the hold unit image GR. It is a counter for specifying by the sound light side MPU 82 how many steps of the display mode is in the degree. Further, as described above, the display change effect counter is a counter for specifying the end trigger of the state when the display change effect is executed by the sound / light side MPU 82, and may be changed. The number of game times executed until the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR to be the suggestion target becomes the start target of the game times is set in the display change effect counter. That is, in step S1707, the value of the number of stages at which the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability in the state where the current display change effect is executed, can be promoted is the value of the number of stages at which the current display change effect is executed. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value of the number of game times remaining in the state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, the lottery process for promotion execution is executed (step S1708). In the promotion execution lottery process, the promotion execution lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for promotion execution lottery that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the promotion execution lottery table read into the sound light side RAM 84. .. The probability of winning the promotion execution in the lottery process of the promotion execution is constant at 60%, but it is not limited to this, and the special figure corresponding to the pending unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. The probability of winning the promotion execution may differ depending on the content of the side hold information.

If the promotion execution is not won in the promotion execution lottery process (step S1709: NO), the process proceeds to step S1715 without executing the processes of steps S1710 to S1714. In this case, in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21), the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability. Although the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, is not changed. Read out. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

When the promotion execution is won in the lottery process of the promotion execution (step S1709: YES), the one-step promotion information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1710). The one-step promotion information is changed from the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of possibility of change in the display change effect in this game rounding effect, to the display mode one step higher in the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that the display effect to be performed should be executed. When the one-step promotion information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, in the reading process of the effect execution table in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21), above the reserved unit image GR which is the target of suggestion of changeability. The display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the CH1 is temporarily stopped, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability causes a big hit result. The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect in which the expected degree of is changed to the display mode one step higher is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). After that, the value of the promotion target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1711).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, the process of calculating the number of steps is executed (step S1712). Specifically, the value of the display change effect counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is subtracted from the value of the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the promotion information corresponding to the calculated number of steps is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1713). For the promotion information corresponding to the number of stages, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change in the display change effect in this game rounding effect, is calculated in step S1712 in terms of the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that a display effect for changing to the above display mode by the number of steps is to be executed. When the promotion information corresponding to the number of stages is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the hold unit image GR which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped, and the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is a big hit. The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect in which the expected degree of occurrence of the result is changed to the above display mode by the number of steps calculated in step S1712 is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). After that, the value corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S1712 is subtracted from the value of the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1714).

When the value of the promotion target counter is larger than the value of the display change effect counter as described above, the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of changeability, is higher by the number of steps of the difference. Will be changed to. This makes it possible to diversify the number of stages in which the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the display change effect in one game turn effect, is changed at one time. In addition, it is possible to facilitate the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, to be a display mode that can be finally reached, which is determined at the start of the state in which the display change effect of this time is executed. Become.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, a negative determination is made in step S1709, the process of step S1711 is executed, or the process of step S1714 is executed, the multiple change flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 is set to "1". Is set or not (step S1715). As already described, the multiple change flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 82 to specify that the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the plurality of dummy targets should be changed to "blue". When "1" is set in the multiple change flag (step S1715: YES), after storing the multiple change information in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1716), the multiple change flag is cleared to "0" (step S1717). ..

The multiple change information is 3 in the order in which the game round is started with respect to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change in the display change effect in this game round production. It is necessary to execute a display effect that changes the display mode of the hold unit image GR of the dummy target corresponding to each of the three special figure side hold information from the previous one to the previous one from "white" to "blue". This is information for specifying by the sound light side MPU 82. In this case, if there are 3 or less special figure side hold information to start the game before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability, that special feature. All of the hold unit image GRs of the dummy target corresponding to each of the hold information on the drawing side are subject to the change of the display mode. In addition, if there are four or more special figure side hold information to be started in the game before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability, the change is possible. The hold unit image GR of the dummy target corresponding to the three special figure side hold information from 3 to 1 before is displayed for the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR corresponding to the suggestion target of sex. It is subject to change of aspect.

When the plurality of change information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target specified as described above in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target is changed from "white" to "blue". The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect changed to "" is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. In this case, when a plurality of hold unit image GRs to be dummy targets are specified as described above, a display change suggestion image for each hold unit image GR to be a dummy target in one game rounding effect. The effect execution table in which the above-mentioned display effect by CH1 is executed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). It should be noted that the hold unit image GR whose display mode is already "blue" in the hold unit image GR of the dummy target included in the target whose display mode is changed when the plurality of change information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. If is included, the reserved unit image GR is not a target for changing the display mode from "white" to "blue".

When "1" is not set in the multiple change flag (step S1715: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the dummy target flag of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1718). As already described, the dummy target flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target needs to be changed by the sound light side MPU 82, and the dummy target flag is set to "1". In the situation where "" is set, it means that the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target has not been changed yet in the state where the display change effect of this time is executed.

When "1" is set in the dummy target flag (step S1718: YES), the lottery process for executing the dummy change is executed (step S1719). In the dummy change execution lottery process, the dummy change execution lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the dummy change execution lottery that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound light side RAM 84 for the dummy change execution lottery table. Match. The probability of winning the dummy change execution in the lottery process of the dummy change execution is constant at 60%, but it is not limited to this and corresponds to the pending unit image GR which is the suggestion target of the possibility of change. Dummy change execution may be different depending on the content of the special figure side hold information, and the dummy change may be made according to the content of the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR to be dummy. It may be configured such that the probability of winning the execution is different.

When the dummy change execution is won in the lottery process of the dummy change execution (step S1720: YES), the dummy change execution information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1721). The dummy change execution information changes the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the dummy target corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter of the sound light side RAM 84, from "white" to "blue" in the display change effect in the game rounding effect. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that the display effect to be changed to is to be executed. When the dummy change execution information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the dummy target corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target is changed. Is changed from "white" to "blue". The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). After that, the dummy target flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1722).

Even if the dummy target flag is set to "1" as described above, unless the dummy change execution is won in the lottery process of the dummy change execution, the dummy target corresponding to the dummy target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 is used. Since the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy is not changed, it is possible to make the timing at which the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy change irregular.

In the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR whose changeability is suggested is changed by the display change effect, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR which is the dummy target is displayed. It may be executed before the game times changed by the change effect. Further, in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR whose display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target is changed by the display change effect is the display mode of the hold unit image GR whose possibility of change is suggested. May be executed before the game times changed by the display change effect. Further, in the same game round in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target is changed by the display change effect, while the hold unit image GR to be a suggestion target of changeability is changed. Although the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is May not be changed. Further, in the same game round in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed from the initial display mode with the display change suggestion image CH1 temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target. Although the display mode is changed to the sex display mode, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is not changed, while the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed by the display change effect. be. Further, in the same game round in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed from the initial display mode with the display change suggestion image CH1 temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target. Although the display mode is changed to the sex display mode, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is not changed, and the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability. In this state, the display mode may be changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode, but the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, may not be changed. Further, in the same game times in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target is changed by the display change effect, and the hold unit image GR to be a suggestion target of the changeability. The display mode may be changed by the display change effect.

When the display change effect is executed as the effect for the game times, the display change suggestion image CH1 corresponds to the special figure side hold information in which the digestion order of the game times is early, as described above. The holding unit image corresponding to the special drawing side holding information whose digestion order is slow is moved and displayed toward the GR side. Therefore, in the same game round, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is changed by the display change effect, and the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed by the display change effect. In this case, after the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the dummy target is changed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be the suggestion target of the changeability is changed. As a result, even if the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target is changed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be further suggested to be changeable in the game round is changed. It is possible to make people expect.

When "1" is not set in the dummy target flag (step S1718: NO), or when the dummy change execution is not won in the lottery process of the dummy change execution (step S1720: NO), the sound / light side RAM 84 It is determined whether or not the value of the dummy target counter is 1 or more (step S1723). As described above, the dummy target counter is a counter for specifying the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target on the sound / light side MPU 82. When the value of the dummy target counter is 1 or more (step S1723: YES), the fanning effect information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1724). When the fanning effect information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed above the hold unit image GR to be a dummy in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display mode is temporarily stopped, but the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is not changed. It is read out to the side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

Next, a processing configuration for ending the display change effect will be described.

The process for terminating the display change effect is executed in steps S1111 to S1115 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). Specifically, when it is the end timing of the game rounding effect (step S1111: YES), the value of the display change effect counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1112), and a dummy target of the sound light side RAM 84 is targeted. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1113). As a result, when the special figure side hold information is newly digested with the end of the game round and the special figure side hold information stored in the hold is shifted in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102. Can make the value of the display change effect counter a value corresponding to the display order of the hold unit image GR to be the suggestion target of changeability, and set the value of the dummy target counter to the hold unit image to be the dummy target. It is possible to set the value corresponding to the display order of GR.

After that, on condition that the value of the display change effect counter after 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1114: YES), the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1115). .. As a result, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of changeability, is the start target of the game round, the state in which the display change effect is executed is terminated. ..

Next, a processing configuration for changing the execution content of the display change effect when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed will be described.

When the first hold command or the second hold command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 due to the new acquisition of the special figure side hold information, the hold command reception processing (hold command reception processing) by the sound light side MPU 82 as described above. FIG. 15) is executed. Then, the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27) is executed in step S1316 in the hold effect setting process (FIG. 25) executed in step S611 of the hold command reception process (FIG. 15).

In the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27), when "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1401: YES), by referring to the effect side hold area 125, this time. It is determined whether or not the acquired special drawing side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result (step S1414). When determining whether or not it corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach, the same process as in step S1503 in the scenario lottery table reading process (FIG. 30) is executed, and when determining whether or not it corresponds to the occurrence of a jackpot result. Executes the same process as step S1501 in the scenario lottery table read process (FIG. 30).

If the reserved information on the special figure side acquired this time does not correspond to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result (step S1414: NO), the setting process of this display change effect is performed without executing the processes after step S1415. finish. That is, even if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display is changed if the special figure side hold information does not correspond to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result. The execution content of the production is not changed. As a result, the execution content of the display change effect is changed on condition that the newly acquired special figure side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the change in the execution content of.

When the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result (step S1414: YES), the special figure acquired this time is obtained by referring to the production side hold area 125. Prior to the side hold information, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result exists in the special figure side hold information to be started of the game round (step S1415). ). At the time of the determination, the same process as in step S1403 in the setting process of the display change effect (FIG. 27) is executed.

When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result exists in the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information acquired this time ( Step S1415: YES), the setting process of this display change effect is terminated without executing the processes after step S1416. That is, even if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, a predetermined reach or a jackpot result occurs in the special figure side hold information that has been held and stored up to that point. If the corresponding special drawing side hold information exists, the effect content of the display change effect is not changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the predetermined reach or the jackpot result from occurring while the display change effect is being executed. In addition, the changeability is possible even though the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability that has already been set corresponds to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result. It is possible to prevent the pending unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the above, from being changed.

When the special figure side hold information that is the target of the start of the game round does not have the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result before the special figure side hold information acquired this time ( Step S1415: NO), the scenario change lottery table is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1416). After that, the scenario change lottery process is executed (step S1417). In the scenario change lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter for scenario change that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1416. Match against the lottery table. If the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the predetermined reach, the probability of winning the scenario change is 50%, and the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result. If so, the probability of winning the scenario change is 75%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the former probability may be higher than the latter probability, or the former probability and the latter probability may be the same or substantially the same.

If the scenario change is won (step S1418: YES), the scenario change process is executed (step S1419). FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a scenario change process.

First, the value of the display change effect counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is set in the dummy target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1801). As a result, the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target up to that point is released from the dummy target, and the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability up to that point becomes the dummy target. Further, the dummy target flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). As a result, even if the condition for changing the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target is satisfied in the state where the display change effect up to that point is executed, the display mode has not been changed. In the display change effect after the execution content is changed, the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode with the display change suggestion image CH1 temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target. Although it is changed, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the dummy target is not changed.

After that, the number of special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 is specified by referring to the effect side hold area 125, and the number of the specified special figure side hold information is specified. Information is set in the display change effect counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1803). As described above, the display change effect counter is a counter for specifying the end trigger of the state when the display change effect is executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The value of the display change effect counter is decremented by 1 each time one game round is completed in a situation where "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound light side RAM 84. By executing the process of step S1803, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time is newly set as a suggestion target of changeability.

After that, the scenario lottery table reading process is executed (step S1804), and the scenario lottery process is executed (step S1805). The processing contents of these steps S1804 and S1805 are the same as those of steps S1411 and S1412 in the setting processing of the display change effect (FIG. 27). As a result, the scenario data corresponding to the number of reserved information on the special figure side currently held and selected in the lottery process according to the mode corresponding to the content of the reserved information on the special figure side acquired this time is acquired. .. However, since the special figure side hold information that triggers the change of the execution content of the display change effect corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result, the scenario lottery table reading process in step S1804 (FIG. 30). In step S1502 or step S1504, the scenario lottery table is read out.

After that, the number of promotion stages is grasped (step S1806). Specifically, the display mode that can be finally reached of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability in the scenario data acquired this time is the occurrence of a jackpot result with respect to the current display mode of the hold unit image GR. Understand how many levels of display mode the expectation level is.

Here, in the hold effect setting process (FIG. 25), when "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1301: YES), the information corresponding to the "white" display mode is displayed. , Of the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side holding area 125, the holding display area is set in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side holding information acquired this time (step S1314). That is, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time is "white" at the start of display. Further, in the scenario lottery table reading process (FIG. 30) in the scenario change process, the scenario lottery table is read out in step S1502 or step S1504 as described above, so that the display mode that can be finally reached is "green". It will be either "red" or "rainbow color". Therefore, for example, when the display mode that can be finally reached in the scenario data is "red", it is specified that there are four stages. Further, when the display mode that can be finally reached in the scenario data is "green", it is specified that there are three stages. Then, the numerical information corresponding to the specified number of steps is set in the promotion target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1807). That is, when it is specified that there are four stages as in the above example, "4" is set in the promotion target counter, and when it is specified that there are three stages as in the above example, "3" is set in the promotion target counter. To set.

After that, "1" is set in the scenario change flag provided in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1808). The scenario change flag specifies on the sound light side MPU 82 that the execution content of the display change effect has been changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed. It is a flag for.

Next, when the execution content of the display change effect is changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the execution control of the subsequent display change effect is controlled. The processing configuration for performing is described.

First, when the execution content of the display change effect is changed triggered by the newly acquired special figure side hold information in the middle of the game round, the display change effect according to the changed execution content in the game round. Will be described when it is possible to execute. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the display change effect processing executed in step S1109 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

When "1" is set in the scenario change flag of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1901: YES), the current timing is the timing at which the execution content of the display change effect in this game round can be changed. Whether or not it is determined (step S1902). In this case, if the display continuation period of this game round is a short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is not executed in this game round in the first place, so the current timing is the display change in this game round. It is determined that the timing cannot change the execution content of the effect. In addition, if the display continuation period of this game round is a display continuation period other than the short period (1.5 seconds) and it is determined that the display change effect is executed in the game round effect, the change is made. Change the display at the position above the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the possibility. If the timing is before the timing when the suggestion image CH1 is stopped and displayed, the execution content of the display change effect in this game round is changed. If it is determined that it is possible to do this, and the timing is after the timing when the display change suggestion image CH1 is stopped and displayed at the position above the hold unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability, this time. It is determined that it is the timing at which the execution content of the display change effect in the game times cannot be changed. It should be noted that the timing at which the display change suggestion image CH1 is stopped and displayed at a position above the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, in the effect execution table of the game rounding effect on which the display change effect is executed. Information is set, and the above determination is made according to the information.

If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the display change effect processing is terminated without executing the processing after step S1903. As a result, even if the execution content of the display change effect is changed due to the new acquisition of the special figure side hold information in the predetermined game time in which the display change effect is executed, the predetermined game time is performed. In, the display change effect according to the execution content after the change is not executed. In this case, if the display continuation period of the predetermined game times is the display continuation period in which the display change effect can be executed, the display change effect is performed according to the contents determined at the start of the predetermined game times. Will be executed. Then, from the next game round to the predetermined game round, the display change effect is executed according to the execution content after the change.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the scenario change flag of the sound light side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S1903). After that, by referring to the effect side hold area 125, whether or not the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 is "blue" or more in the expected degree of the jackpot result. Is determined (step S1904). Specifically, information corresponding to a display mode other than "white" is displayed in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125. Determine if it is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, the process for specifying the number of stages is executed (step S1905). As described above, in the hold effect setting process (FIG. 25), when "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1301: YES), the information corresponding to the display mode of "white". Is set as the hold display area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 (step S1314). That is, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information acquired this time is "white" at the start of display. Therefore, in step S1905, the number of steps corresponding to the information stored in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 is determined. Identify. That is, if the information stored in the hold display area is "blue", "1" is specified as the number of steps, and if the information stored in the hold display area is "yellow", the number of steps is "1". 2 ”is specified, and if the information stored in the hold display area is“ green ”,“ 3 ”is specified as the number of steps.

In addition, in the situation where the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result is already held and stored, the execution content of the display change effect is changed even if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired. Furthermore, the display mode of "red" is not selected unless it is the reserved information on the special figure side corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is the jackpot result. It is not selected unless it is the reserved information on the special drawing side corresponding to the occurrence. Therefore, the information stored in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 becomes "red" or "rainbow color". There is no correspondence. On the other hand, in the scenario change table reading process (FIG. 30) in step S1804 in the scenario change process (FIG. 33), the scenario lottery table is read in step S1502 or step S1504 as described above, so that the scenario lottery table is finally reached. The display mode to be obtained is one of "green", "red" and "rainbow color". That is, in the display mode of the hold unit image GR of the dummy target specified in step S1905, the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is the highest is "green", whereas the display mode can be changed after the scenario is changed. The display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is the lowest in the display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of sex suggestion, is also “green”. Therefore, even if the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed to the display mode of the number of steps specified in step S1905, the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed. It does not exceed the reachable display mode determined in the above.

After that, the promotion information corresponding to the number of steps specified in step S1905 is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1906). For the promotion information corresponding to the number of stages, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change in the display change effect in this game rounding effect, is specified in step S1905 in terms of the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that a display effect for changing to the above display mode by the number of steps is to be executed. After that, the value corresponding to the number of steps specified in step S1905 is subtracted from the value of the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1907).

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, one-step promotion information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1908). The one-step promotion information has been changed from the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of possibility of change in the display change effect in this game rounding effect, to the display form one step higher in the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that the display effect to be performed should be executed. After that, the value of the promotion target counter of the sound / light side RAM 84 is subtracted by 1 (step S1909).

When the process of step S1907 or step S1909 is executed, the process of changing the effect execution table of the game times is executed (step S1910). In the change process, if the promotion information corresponding to the number of stages is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the hold unit image newly becomes a dummy target as a series of flow from the display change effect already executed. Display effect that the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped, but the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is not changed. Then, the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the target of the suggestion of changeability. Suggestion of changeability There will be a display effect in which the display mode of the reserved unit image GR is changed to a display mode in which the expected degree of the jackpot result is higher by the number of steps specified in step S1905. The effect execution table is newly read out to the sound / light side RAM 84.

Further, in the above change process, if the one-step promotion information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the hold unit image GR newly becomes a dummy target as a series of flow from the display change effect already executed. A display effect in which the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the dummy target, is not changed although the display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped. , The display mode is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is the target of the new suggestion of changeability. Possibility of suggestion The display mode of the pending unit image GR, which is the target of the possibility, is changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the jackpot result is one step higher. It is newly read out.

After that, the effect change command corresponding to the effect execution table newly read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 in step S1910 is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1911). As a result, the content of the display effect in the symbol display device 41 is changed to the content corresponding to the effect execution table newly read out in the sound / light side RAM 84.

The effect execution table newly read out to the sound / light side RAM 84 is set in the effect execution table that has been read into the sound / light side RAM 84 for the effect contents other than the display change effect. It is the same as the content. Therefore, even if the content of the display change effect executed in the game round effect is changed in the middle of the game round, the content of the other effects is not changed. This is the same in any of the light emission effect in the display light emitting unit 53, the sound output effect in the speaker unit 54, and the display effect in the symbol display device 41.

Next, when the execution content of the display change effect is changed triggered by the newly acquired special figure side hold information in the middle of the game round, the display according to the changed execution content in the game round. A case where the display change effect is executed according to the execution content after the change from the next game time of the game time because the change effect cannot be executed will be described.

In the start processing of the display change effect (FIG. 32), which is executed when the game turn effect is started, when the display continuation period of the current game turn is the display continuation period in which the display change effect can be executed (step S1701). : YES), it is determined in step S1702 whether or not "1" is set in the scenario change flag of the sound / light side RAM 84. When "1" is set in the scenario change flag (step S1702: YES), after clearing the scenario change flag "0" (step S1703), the sound and light side can be referred to by referring to the production side hold area 125. It is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter of the RAM 84 is “blue” or more in the expected degree of the jackpot result (step S1704). Specifically, information corresponding to a display mode other than "white" is displayed in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125. Determine if it is stored.

If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the processes after step S1706 are executed. The processing content of the processing after step S1706 is as described above. As a result, the hold unit image GR, which was the target of suggestion of the possibility of change before the execution content of the display change effect is changed, becomes a dummy target, and the special figure side hold that triggered the change of the execution content of the display change effect. The display change effect is executed in a state where the hold unit image GR corresponding to the information is the suggestion target of the possibility of change. In this case, the display mode of the hold unit image GR newly used as a dummy target is not changed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process for specifying the number of steps is executed (step S1705). As described above, in the hold effect setting process (FIG. 25), when "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1301: YES), the information corresponding to the display mode of "white". Is set as the hold display area in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the special drawing side hold information acquired this time among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 (step S1314). That is, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the change of the execution content of the display change effect is "white" at the start of display. Therefore, in step S1705, the number of steps corresponding to the information stored in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 is set. Identify. That is, if the information stored in the hold display area is "blue", "1" is specified as the number of steps, and if the information stored in the hold display area is "yellow", the number of steps is "1". 2 ”is specified, and if the information stored in the hold display area is“ green ”,“ 3 ”is specified as the number of steps.

In addition, in the situation where the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result is already held and stored, the execution content of the display change effect is changed even if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired. Furthermore, the display mode of "red" is not selected unless it is the reserved information on the special figure side corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach or the occurrence of the jackpot result, and the display mode of "rainbow color" is the jackpot result. It is not selected unless it is the reserved information on the special drawing side corresponding to the occurrence. Therefore, the information stored in the hold display area in the area corresponding to the value of the dummy target counter among the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125 becomes "red" or "rainbow color". There is no correspondence. On the other hand, in the scenario change table reading process (FIG. 30) in step S1804 in the scenario change process (FIG. 33), the scenario lottery table is read in step S1502 or step S1504 as described above, so that the scenario lottery table is finally reached. The display mode to be obtained is one of "green", "red" and "rainbow color". That is, in the display mode of the hold unit image GR of the dummy target specified in step S1705, the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is the highest is "green", whereas the display mode can be changed after the scenario is changed. The display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is the lowest in the display mode that can be finally reached of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of sex suggestion, is also “green”. Therefore, even if the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed to the display mode of the number of steps specified in step S1705, the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is changed. It does not exceed the reachable display mode determined in the above.

After that, the promotion information corresponding to the number of steps specified in step S1705 is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S1713). The promotion information corresponding to the number of stages is the stage in which the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the display change effect in this game rounding effect, is specified in step S1705 in the expected degree of the jackpot result. This is information for specifying on the sound / light side MPU 82 that a display effect for changing to the above display mode by a few minutes should be executed. When the promotion information corresponding to the number of stages is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the hold unit image GR which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed from the initial display mode to the changeable display mode while the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped, and the display mode of the reserved unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability is a big hit. The effect execution table corresponding to the display effect in which the expected degree of the result is changed to the display mode that is higher by the number of steps specified in step S1705 is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20). After that, the value corresponding to the number of steps specified in step S1705 is subtracted from the value of the promotion target counter of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S1714).

Next, a state in which the display change effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 35 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 35 (b) shows the period set in the state where the display change effect is executed, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the hold unit image which is a dummy target. The period in which the dummy effect in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped is executed is shown above the GR, and FIG. 35 (d) shows the execution content of the display change effect that is not changed in the middle or can be changed before it is changed. The display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR which is the suggestion target of sex. The period during which the change target effect is being executed is shown, and FIG. FIG. 35 (f) shows the display change suggestion image CH1 above the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change due to the change in the execution content of the display change effect in the middle. Indicates the period during which the effect after changing the scenario is temporarily stopped.

First, when the execution content of the display change effect is changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the display change effect is set to be executed, the change is triggered. A case where the content of the display change effect is changed in the game turn effect of the game time in which the special figure side hold information is acquired will be described.

In the situation where the display change effect is set to be executed, the game round is newly started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 35 (a). Since the display continuation period of the game times is a display continuation period other than the short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is started as shown in FIG. 35 (b) at the timing of the t1. In the display change effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), a dummy effect is executed in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR which is the suggestion target of changeability from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5. Will be executed. In this case, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be dummy in the dummy effect may be changed or may not be changed. In addition, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the effect to be changed, may be changed or may not be changed. When the effect to be changed is terminated as shown in FIG. 35 (d) at the timing of t5, the display change effect in the current game rounding effect is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (b).

After that, at the timing of t6, the special figure side hold information is acquired as shown in FIG. 35 (e), and at the timing of t7, the current game round is completed as shown in FIG. 35 (a), and a new game round is started. As shown in FIG. 35 (e), the special figure side hold information is acquired at the timing of t8, which is the timing before the start timing. At the timing of t8, the number of special figure side hold information stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 is eight, which is the maximum number of hold information.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), a new game round is started at the timing of t9, which is a situation in which the display change effect is continuously executed. Since the start trigger of the game round occurs in the situation where the number of reserved information on the special figure side is the maximum number of reserved information, the game round is started in the situation where the number of reserved information on the special figure side is 7. Become. In addition, the jackpot result does not occur and the reach display does not occur in the game times. Therefore, the display continuation period of the game times is a short period (1.5 seconds). When the display continuation period of the game round is a short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is not executed in the game round display effect even if the display change effect is executed. Therefore, when the game round is executed from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the display change effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 35 (b).

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), a new game round is started at the timing of t11, which is a situation in which the display change effect is continuously executed. Since the display continuation period of the game times is a display continuation period other than the short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is started as shown in FIG. 35 (b) at the timing of the t11. In the display change effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), a dummy effect is executed in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. Will be done. In the dummy effect, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be dummy may be changed or may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the special figure side hold information is acquired at the timing of t13, which is the situation in which the display change effect in the game rotation effect is being executed. In this case, the timing of the t13 is a timing before the timing at which the change target effect is started for the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability in the display change effect in the game rounding effect. There is. In addition, the special figure side hold information that corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result is included in the special figure side hold information that is the target of the start of the game before the newly acquired special figure side hold information. It does not exist, and the newly acquired special map side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result. Then, the scenario change is won in the scenario change lottery process of step S1417 in the setting process of the display change effect (FIG. 27). Therefore, the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is changed to the hold unit image GR that has been the suggestion target of changeability, and the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is newly acquired this time. It is changed to the hold unit image GR corresponding to the hold information on the special figure side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), a dummy effect is executed in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR that is a new dummy target from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15. To. In this dummy effect, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is not surely changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), a scenario in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17. After the change, the effect is executed. In this scenario-changed effect, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is surely changed. Specifically, if the display mode of the newly held hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is blue or more, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is the hold unit that is the dummy target. The display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of the image GR. On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the new dummy target is "white", the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of further possibility is changed from "white" to "blue". To. At the timing of t17, the effect after changing the scenario is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (f), and the display change effect in the current game rounding effect is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (b). Then, at the timing of t18, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

Next, when the execution content of the display change effect is changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the display change effect is set to be executed, the change trigger. The case where the content of the display change effect is not changed in the game turn effect of the game time in which the special figure side hold information is acquired will be described.

In the situation where the display change effect is set to be executed, the game round is newly started at the timing of t19 as shown in FIG. 35 (a). Since the display continuation period of the game times is a display continuation period other than the short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is started as shown in FIG. 35 (b) at the timing of the t19. Since the hold unit image GR to be a dummy does not exist in the display change effect, the dummy effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 35 (c). Further, in the display change effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR which is the target of suggestion of changeability from the timing of t20 to the timing of t22. The change target effect is executed. In this case, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability in the effect to be changed, may be changed or may not be changed. When the effect to be changed is terminated as shown in FIG. 35 (d) at the timing of t22, the display change effect in the current game rounding effect is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (b).

Here, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), the special figure side hold information is acquired at the timing of t21, which is the situation where the change target effect is being executed. Prior to the newly acquired special figure side hold information, there is special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result in the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round. Furthermore, the newly acquired special map side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of a predetermined reach or the occurrence of a jackpot result. Then, the scenario change is won in the scenario change lottery process of step S1417 in the setting process of the display change effect (FIG. 27). Therefore, the hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is changed to the hold unit image GR that has been the suggestion target of changeability, and the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is newly acquired this time. It is changed to the hold unit image GR corresponding to the hold information on the special figure side. However, the timing of t21 when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired this time is subject to change with respect to the hold unit image GR initially set as the suggestion target of the possibility of change in the display change effect in this game rounding effect. The timing is after the timing of t20 when the production is started. Therefore, the effect after changing the scenario is not executed in the display change effect in the game turn effect this time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), a new game round is started at the timing of t24, which is a situation in which the display change effect is continuously executed. Since the display continuation period of the game times is a display continuation period other than the short period (1.5 seconds), the display change effect is started as shown in FIG. 35 (b) at the timing of the t24. In the display change effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), a dummy effect is executed in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR to be a dummy target from the timing of t25 to the timing of t26. Will be done. In this dummy effect, the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be a dummy is not changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), a scenario in which the display change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped above the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of the possibility of change from the timing of t27 to the timing of t28. After the change, the effect is executed. In this scenario-changed effect, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is surely changed. Specifically, if the display mode of the newly held hold unit image GR that is the dummy target is blue or more, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is the hold unit that is the dummy target. The display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of the image GR. On the other hand, if the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the new dummy target is "white", the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of further possibility is changed from "white" to "blue". To. At the timing of t28, the effect after changing the scenario is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (f), and the display change effect in the current game rounding effect is ended as shown in FIG. 35 (b). Then, at the timing of t29, this game round ends as shown in FIG. 35 (a).

<Confirmed production of consecutive villas>
Next, the final production of the consecutive villas will be described.

The final production of the consecutive villas is executed as a kind of final production. The definite effect is an effect in which the effect content indicating that the jackpot result is generated occurs before the stop result after the variation display of the symbols of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed. Is. In the pachinko machine 10, there are a normal fixed effect and a continuous villa finalized effect as the continuous villa finalized effect.

The normal confirmation effect is performed in the game times that result in the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result regardless of whether or not the special figure side hold information that is the jackpot result is reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102. It is a definite production that can be executed. In the normal final effect, in the game times that result in the second jackpot or the third jackpot, the combination of the same symbols after the variation display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in more detail. Is usually displayed as a definite suggestion image in a situation where reach display is performed. Further, the normal confirmation effect occurs when the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination in the game times that result in a big hit. The same odd-numbered symbol combination occurs when the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is 50, that is, in the game times corresponding to the second big hit result or the third big hit result. Therefore, the player who confirms that the normal confirmation suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect for the game round not only results in a big hit in the game round, but also in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode. You will be confident that the number of continuous games will be 50, which is a relatively large number. Therefore, the player usually expects that the confirmation suggestion image is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The consecutive villa confirmation effect is a jackpot result in which the digestion order is earlier than the special figure side hold information in the situation where the special figure side hold information that is the jackpot result is held and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102. It is a definite production that is executed in the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information. In the consecutive villa confirmation production, in the game times that result in a big hit, the stage before the combination of the same symbols after the variation display of the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, and more specifically, the reach display is performed. In this situation, a confirmation image of the consecutive villas is displayed. In a game round in which a consecutive villa confirmation effect occurs, the same symbol is used regardless of whether the special figure side hold information that triggered the start of the game round corresponds to any of the first to third jackpot results. As a combination of, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The combination of the same even-numbered symbols is selected in the game times that result in the first big hit, except for the game times in which the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed. However, when the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is included in the special figure side hold information held and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102 at that time. Will be included. Therefore, the player who confirms that the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect for the game round not only results in a big hit in the game round, but also holds and stores the predetermined image at that time. You will be confident that the jackpot result will occur even in the game times corresponding to the special figure side hold information. Therefore, even if the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is finally stopped and displayed in the game times in which the consecutive villa confirmation effect occurs, the player gets a great satisfaction from the display of the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the consecutive villa confirmation effect, after the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image is displayed, among the hold unit image GR displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is supported. A fixed hold change effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold unit image GR to be changed is changed to a display mode (specifically, “rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. As a result, the player can grasp the number of game times after the end of the open / close execution mode triggered by this game time, in which the jackpot result occurs. In addition, the hold unit image GR that has been changed to the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by the fixed hold change effect starts the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. Until, that is, while the display of the reserved unit image GR is continued, the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is maintained. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize in which order the game times the jackpot result occurs.

Here, prior to the explanation of the specific execution contents of the normal confirmation effect and the consecutive villa confirmation effect, the ending image displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the ending period generated after all the round games are completed in the open / close execution mode. The contents of are explained. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the ending image.

FIG. 36A shows the content of the first ending image G1 which is the result of the first big hit in the situation where the continuous villa confirmation effect is not executed and is displayed in the ending period of the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the ending display image CH11 (character image "END") indicating that it is the ending period and the small number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode are relatively small, 25 times. The number image CH12 (character image "chance 25 times") is displayed. Even when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the number of hold information on the special figure side held and stored is displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. There is.

FIG. 36B shows the content of the second ending image G2 which is the second big hit result or the third big hit result in the situation where the continuous villa confirmation effect is not executed and is displayed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode thereafter. There is. In this case, the ending display image CH11 (character image "END") indicating that it is the ending period and the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode are 50 times, which is relatively large. The number image CH13 (character image "chance 50 times") is displayed. Even when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the number of hold information on the special figure side held and stored is displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. There is.

In FIG. 36 (c), the hold unit image GR11 changed to the display mode (specifically, “rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by the fixed hold change effect after the continuous villa final effect is executed is displayed. It is one of the first to third jackpot results in the present situation, and shows the contents of the third ending image G3 displayed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode thereafter. In this case, the ending display image CH11 (character image "END") indicating that it is the ending period and the next confirmed image indicating that the jackpot result will occur again within the range of the reserved information on the special figure side that is reserved and stored. CH14 (character image "next confirmed") is displayed. Even when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 includes the hold unit image GR11, which is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and is held and stored. The number of holding unit images GR corresponding to the number of holdings of the holding information on the drawing side is displayed.

37 (a) to 37 (h) and 38 (a) to 38 (g) are explanatory views for explaining how the continuous villa confirmation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, since the six special figure side hold information is reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, six hold unit image GRs are stored in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed. The display mode of these six reserved unit image GRs is "white", which has the lowest expectation of a jackpot result.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, the "6" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, respectively, and in that situation, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Reach display is generated by performing. Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image CH21 is displayed in the situation where the reach display is performed. That is, the consecutive villa confirmation effect is generated in the game times. By confirming that the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image CH21 is displayed, the player is confident that a jackpot result will occur in this game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the "6" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in which the reach line by the "6" symbol is formed, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It will be stopped. That is, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game rounding effect this time. Then, the movement display of the fixed hold change image CH22 is performed in the situation where the same even number symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the fixed hold change image CH22 reaches the fifth hold unit image GR11 from the left. At the timing, the display mode of the hold unit image GR11 is changed from "white" to "rainbow color" corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and a fixed hold change effect is performed. When the player confirms the fixed hold change effect and the special figure side hold information corresponding to the fifth hold unit image GR11 from the left becomes the start target of the game round, a big hit result is generated in the game round. I'm sure that.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In the current ending period, as shown in FIG. 37 (d), the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the third ending image G3 including the next confirmed image CH14. Further, in the hold display area 41a, a plurality of hold unit image GRs including the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result are displayed.

Here, since the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is actually 50 times. In this case, when the variation display of the symbols is stopped in the game rounding effect, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, and the second ending image G2 including the ending display image CH11 and the multiple image CH13 is displayed during the ending period. A configuration to display is also conceivable. However, after the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed and the second ending image G2 is displayed, the special figure side holding information corresponding to the holding unit image GR, which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, is used. If the first big hit result is obtained in the game times, the open / close execution mode has occurred, but the high frequency support mode has been set to 50 times, which is a relatively large number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode. It is feared that the player will be disappointed that the number of continuous games has reached 25, which is relatively small.

On the other hand, in the situation where the hold unit image GR, which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result as described above, exists, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and then. During the ending period of the open / close execution mode that occurred in, the third ending image G3 that does not clearly indicate the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above.

In addition, in order to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above, the ending display image is displayed even during the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second big hit result or the third big hit result. A configuration for displaying the first ending image G1 including CH 11 and a small number of image CH 12 is also conceivable. However, in this case, although the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is actually 50, it is notified that the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is 25. On the other hand, by displaying the third ending image G3 that does not clearly indicate the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode, the player is disappointed as described above without notifying the number of continuous games that is different from the actual one. It is possible to prevent the situation that makes you think.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 37 (e), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of this game round. , The number of special drawing side hold information stored on hold is five. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR11 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fifth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth. The display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR2 is the same "rainbow color" as the display mode of the fifth hold unit image GR1 in the previous game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (f), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 37 (g), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of this game round. , The number of special drawing side hold information stored on hold is four. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR11 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the third. The display mode of the third hold unit image GR2 is the same "rainbow color" as the display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR1 in the previous game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (h), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the combination of "4" symbols is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 via the reach display. That is, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game rounding effect this time. Even in the situation where the hold unit image GR changed to the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by the fixed hold change effect by the continuous villa final effect is displayed, the hold unit is displayed. A big hit result may occur triggered by the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the image GR. This makes it possible to give the player unexpectedness.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In the current ending period, as shown in FIG. 38A, the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the third ending image G3 including the next confirmed image CH14. Further, in the hold display area 41a, a plurality of hold unit image GRs including the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result are displayed. In this case, the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second jackpot result, but in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is clearly indicated instead of the second ending image G2. No Third ending image G3 is displayed.

After that, the game is played twice. In the rear game round of these two game rounds, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), after the variation display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is shown in FIG. 38 (c). As a result, the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. Further, the hold unit image GR11, which is a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result at the timing when the game round is started, is displayed on the leftmost side.

After that, the game round is started triggered by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR which is the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, respectively, and in that situation, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Is performed, and the reach display is generated. Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the normal confirmation suggestion image CH23 is displayed in the situation where the reach display is performed. That is, a definite effect is usually generated in the game times. By confirming that the confirmation suggestion image CH23 is normally displayed, the player is confident that a jackpot result will occur in this game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (f), the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in which the reach line by the "7" symbol is formed, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It will be stopped. In other words, the special figure side hold information that triggered the start of this game round corresponds to the third big hit result, and the same "7" symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of this game round production. To.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In this ending period, as shown in FIG. 38 (g), the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the second ending image G2 including the multi-number image CH13.

In addition, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR, which has become the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by executing the fixed hold change effect, becomes the start target of the game turn, the game turn It is not essential that the third jackpot result occurs in the above, and the second jackpot result may occur or the first jackpot result may occur. If the second big hit result is generated, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and the second ending image G2 is displayed in the ending period of the open / close execution mode. Further, if the first big hit result is generated, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and the first ending image G1 is displayed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the continuous villa confirmation effect will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a final effect setting process executed in step S1204 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21) executed at the start of the game rounding effect. As already explained, the setting process of the final effect is executed when the special figure side hold information that is the start target of this game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result.

First, by referring to the hold display area in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125, the hold unit image GR currently displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 is included. It is determined whether or not there is a hold unit image GR that has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process for executing the consecutive villa confirmation effect in steps S2002 to S2008 is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the hold unit image GR is displayed in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result regardless of whether or not the fixed hold change effect is executed, the consecutive villa is confirmed. It is possible to prevent the event that the fixed hold change effect by the effect is executed and the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result occurs in another hold unit image GR. .. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process for executing the normal confirmation effect in steps S2009 to S2012 is not executed. As a result, the second jackpot is displayed in the situation where the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed regardless of whether or not the fixed hold change effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the result or the third big hit result, that is, the normal definite effect that suggests that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is 50 times. It becomes.

When a negative determination is made in step S2001, the special figure side hold information stored on hold is stored by referring to the hit / fail area at the time of high probability in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125. It is determined whether or not there is special figure side hold information that results in a big hit in the high probability mode (step S2002). When the special figure side hold information that results in a big hit in the high probability mode exists in the special figure side hold information stored on hold (step S2002: YES), the special that is the start target of this game round. The figure-side hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and the special figure-side hold information that becomes the jackpot result in the high probability mode among the special figure-side hold information that is held and stored at the start of this game round. Means that is present.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the execution lottery process for the continuous villa confirmation effect is executed (step S2003). In the execution lottery process of the consecutive villa confirmation effect, the execution lottery table of the consecutive villa confirmation effect is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the execution lottery of the continuous villa confirmation effect that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound light side RAM 84 for the continuous villa confirmation effect. Check against the execution lottery table.

Execution of consecutive villa confirmed production The probability of winning the execution of consecutive villa confirmed production is constant at 40%, but it is not limited to this, and the jackpot result generated in this game round The probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect may differ depending on the type of. For example, the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect when the most advantageous third jackpot result occurs in this game round is higher when the second jackpot result occurs in this game round. The configuration may be higher than the probability of winning the execution of the villa confirmation effect, and the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect when the second big hit result occurs in this game time is the game time this time. In the case where the first big hit result occurs, the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect may be higher. Further, for example, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the third big hit result is reserved and stored, the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect is the special that corresponds to the occurrence of the second big hit result. When the drawing side hold information is held and stored, the configuration may be higher than the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect, and the special drawing side holding information corresponding to the occurrence of the second big hit result is held and stored. In this case, the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect is higher than the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the first jackpot result is reserved and stored. It may be a high configuration.

When the execution is won in the execution lottery process of the consecutive villa confirmation effect (step S2004: YES), the winning / failing area at the time of high probability in the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side holding area 125 is referred to. As a result, it is determined whether or not a plurality of special figure side hold information that results in a big hit is stored in the high probability mode (step S2005). When only one special figure side hold information that becomes a big hit result is reserved and stored in the high probability mode (step S2005: NO), the special figure side hold information that becomes a big hit result in the high probability mode is the start target of the game round. The values in the order of becoming are set in the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion counter provided in the sound light side RAM 84 (step S2006). On the other hand, when a plurality of special figure side hold information resulting in a big hit is stored on hold in the high probability mode (step S2005: YES), the order in which the game round is started is the most among the plurality of special figure side hold information. The value of the order in which the late special figure side hold information is the start target of the game round is set in the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion counter of the sound light side RAM 84 (step S2007). The consecutive villa confirmation suggestion counter is a counter for specifying the pending unit image GR, which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result in the final holding change effect in the consecutive villa confirmation effect, on the sound light side MPU 82.

When the process of step S2006 or step S2007 is executed, the continuous villa confirmation effect information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S2008). The consecutive villa confirmation effect information is information for specifying on the sound light side MPU 82 that the consecutive villa confirmation effect should be executed in this game rounding effect. When the consecutive villa confirmation information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the display effect and the sound / light in which the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image CH21 is displayed in the effect execution table reading process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). Confirmation that the holding unit image GR is changed to the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by the action of the holding unit image GR corresponding to the value of the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion counter of the side RAM 84. The effect execution table corresponding to the execution of the hold change effect is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

When a negative determination is made in step S2002, or when a negative determination is made in step S2004, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the first jackpot result (step S2009). When the current game round corresponds to the first jackpot result (step S2009: YES), the normal confirmation effect in steps S2010 to S2012 is not executed, whereas this game round is the second jackpot result. Alternatively, if it corresponds to the third big hit result (step S2009: NO), the process for generating the normal final effect in steps S2010 to S2012 is executed. As a result, the player who has confirmed that the normal confirmed effect has been executed in the game round effect is convinced that the second big hit result or the third big hit result will be generated in the game round, and after the open / close execution mode. I am convinced that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode will be 50 times.

In step S2010, the execution lottery process of the normal final effect is executed. In the execution lottery process of the normal confirmation effect, the execution lottery table of the normal confirmation effect is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the execution lottery of the normal confirmation effect that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound light side RAM 84 by the execution lottery of the normal confirmation effect. Match against the table.

Execution of normal confirmed effect The probability of winning the execution of normal confirmed effect in the lottery process is constant at 40%, but it is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot result that occurs in this game round. Depending on the situation, the probability of winning the execution of the final production of the consecutive villas may be different. For example, the probability of winning the execution of the normal confirmed effect when the most advantageous third jackpot result occurs in this game round is usually confirmed when the second jackpot result occurs in this game round. The configuration may be higher than the probability of winning the execution of the production.

Execution of normal confirmation effect When the execution is won in the lottery process (step S2011: YES), the normal confirmation effect information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S2012). The normal fixed effect information is information for the sound light side MPU 82 to specify that the normal confirmed effect should be executed in the game rounding effect this time. When the normal confirmation information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, it corresponds to the execution of the display effect in which the normal confirmation suggestion image CH23 is displayed in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

Next, the stop symbol determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. The stop symbol determination process is executed in step S1206 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21) that is executed at the start of the game rotation effect.

When the current game round does not correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2101: NO), other processing is executed (step S2102). In other processing, if the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of the out-of-reach display, the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is determined by lottery, and the lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the out-of-reach symbols is stopped are set. It is determined by lottery, and the determined out-of-reach symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. When the out-of-reach symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, in the read-out process of the effect execution table in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21), the combination of the symbols corresponding to the stored out-of-reach symbol information is stored. The effect execution table to be stopped and displayed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

In other processing, if the game times this time correspond to the complete deviation in which the reach display does not occur, the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the detached reach symbols are the combination of the complete deviation in which the stop display is not displayed in all lines L1 to L5. It is determined by lottery, and the determined completely out-of-order symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. When the completely deviated symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the stored completely deviated symbol information is stored in the effect execution table read processing in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table to be stopped and displayed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

When the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2101: YES), whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in the current game round effect, or the production side holding area 125. By referring to the hold display area in the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h, the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result. It is determined whether or not GR exists (step S2103). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the even-numbered symbol lottery process is executed (step S2104). In the even-numbered symbol lottery process, the even-numbered symbol lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the symbol lottery that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the even-numbered symbol lottery table read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. As a result, the type of the even-numbered symbols in the case where the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the lines L1 to L5 in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed are displayed. It will be decided by lottery.

After that, the even-numbered symbol information corresponding to the type of the same even-numbered symbol combination determined by the even-numbered symbol lottery process and the types of lines L1 to L5 in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed is transmitted to the sound / light side RAM 84. Store (step S2105). When the even-numbered symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the combination of symbols corresponding to the stored even-numbered symbol information is stopped and displayed in the effect execution table read-out process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table to be performed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

As described above, when the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in the game rounding effect, or the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 is held in a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result. In the situation where the unit image GR is displayed, a jackpot result is generated in the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is earlier than the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. In this case, even if the type of the jackpot result is the second jackpot result and the third jackpot result, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect that is the jackpot result.

When the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is 50 times. In this case, a configuration is also conceivable in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the variable display of the symbols is stopped in the game rounding effect. However, after the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed to make the player recognize that the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is 50, the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. If the first big hit result is obtained in the game round by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR corresponding to (“rainbow color”), the open / close execution mode has occurred, but the high frequency support mode has been used. There is concern that the player will be disappointed that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode has become 25, which is relatively small, even though the number of continuous games was set to 50, which is relatively large. Will be done. On the other hand, as described above, there is a game rounding effect in which the continuous villa confirmation effect is executed, or a hold unit image GR having a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit result. In the game rounding effect in the situation, by stopping and displaying the combination of the same even-numbered symbols, it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, the symbol information of "7" is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 on condition that the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the third big hit result (step S2106: YES). (Step S2107). When the "7" symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the combination of the "7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table corresponding to this is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

That is, the holding unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is not displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed. When the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the third big hit result is executed in the situation where the third big hit result is not performed, the combination of the "7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. The third jackpot result is the most advantageous jackpot result for the player as already explained. Therefore, the player expects that the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed. In particular, the combination of "7" symbols is limited to the middle line L2 which is stopped and displayed. Then, when the reach line by the "7" symbol is formed on the middle line L2 at the stage when the variation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped in the game rounding effect, the player wins the third. We expect the results to occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the odd-numbered symbol lottery process is executed on condition that the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the second big hit result (step S2108: YES) (step S2109). In the odd-numbered symbol lottery process, the odd-numbered symbol lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the symbol lottery that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the odd number symbol lottery table read out to the sound light side RAM 84. As a result, the type of the odd-numbered symbols in the case where the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the lines L1 to L5 in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed are displayed. It will be decided by lottery. However, the odd-numbered symbols selected in the lottery do not include the "7" symbol.

After that, the odd-numbered symbol information corresponding to the type of the same odd-numbered symbol combination determined by the odd-numbered symbol lottery process and the types of lines L1 to L5 in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed is transmitted to the sound light side RAM 84. Store (step S2110). When the odd-numbered symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the stored odd-numbered symbol information is stopped and displayed in the effect execution table read-out process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table to be performed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

That is, the holding unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is not displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed. When the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the second big hit result is executed in the situation where the second jackpot result is not performed, the combination of the same odd number symbols (excluding the "7" symbol) is stopped and displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5. It becomes. As already explained, the second jackpot result is 50 times, which is the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode, which is a relatively large number of times. Therefore, the player expects that the same combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2108, it means that the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of the first big hit result. In this case, the lottery process for even-numbered symbols is executed (step S2111). In the even-numbered symbol lottery process, the even-numbered symbol lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the symbol lottery that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the even-numbered symbol lottery table read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. As a result, the type of the even-numbered symbols in the case where the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the lines L1 to L5 in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed are displayed. It will be decided by lottery.

After that, the even-numbered symbol information corresponding to the type of the same even-numbered symbol combination determined by the even-numbered symbol lottery process and the types of lines L1 to L5 in which the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed is transmitted to the sound / light side RAM 84. Store (step S2112). When the even-numbered symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the combination of symbols corresponding to the stored even-numbered symbol information is stopped and displayed in the effect execution table read-out process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table to be performed is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

That is, whether or not the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the continuous villa confirmation effect is executed. Regardless of whether or not it is performed, when the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first big hit result is executed, the same even-numbered symbol combination will be stopped and displayed on any of the lines L1 to L5. ..

Next, the setting process of the ending effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The ending effect setting process is repeatedly activated by the sound light side MPU 82 in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S2201). The ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound light side MPU 82 when the last round game is completed in the open / close execution mode. When the ending command is received (step S2201: YES), the process for displaying the ending images G1 to G3 in steps S2202 and subsequent steps is executed.

In step S2202, the hold unit image GR currently displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 by referring to the hold display areas in the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125. It is determined whether or not there is a reserved unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the setting process for the next final effect is executed (step S2203). In the setting process of the next confirmation effect, the effect command for displaying the third ending image G3 (FIG. 36 (c)) including the ending display image CH11 and the next confirmation image CH14 on the symbol display device 41 is displayed on the display side MPU 92. do. As a result, the third ending image G3 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the ending period. Further, the effect execution table for executing the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to displaying the third ending image G3 over the ending period is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84.

As described above, the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the hold unit image GR. If the player is aware that the jackpot result will be generated by starting the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information, the jackpot result triggered by the execution of the open / close execution mode Regardless of the type, the third ending image G3 is displayed in which the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is not specified during the ending period.

When the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is 50 times. In this case, a configuration is also conceivable to clearly indicate that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is 50 during the ending period. However, after the player is made to recognize that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is 50, the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is held. If the first big hit result is obtained in the game times based on the special figure side hold information corresponding to the unit image GR, the open / close execution mode has occurred, but the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is relatively large, 50 times. It is feared that the player will be disappointed that the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode has become 25, which is relatively small even though it has been set. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold unit image GR having the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result as described above exists, the third ending image G3 is displayed. As mentioned above, it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate.

In addition, in order to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above, the ending display image is displayed even during the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second big hit result or the third big hit result. A configuration for displaying the first ending image G1 including CH 11 and a small number of image CH 12 is also conceivable. However, in this case, although the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is actually 50, it is notified that the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is 25. On the other hand, by displaying the third ending image G3 that does not clearly indicate the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode, the player is unfortunately as described above without notifying the number of continuous games that is different from the actual one. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202, if the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first jackpot result (step S2204: YES), the setting process of the small number of times effect is executed (step S2205). ). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result (step S2204: NO), the setting process of the multiple times effect is executed (step S2206).

In the setting process of the small number of times effect, the effect command for displaying the first ending image G1 (FIG. 36 (a)) including the ending display image CH11 and the small number of times image CH12 on the symbol display device 41 is displayed on the display side MPU 92. do. As a result, the first ending image G1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the ending period. Further, the effect execution table for executing the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to displaying the first ending image G1 over the ending period is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84.

In the multiple-time effect setting process, the display-side MPU 92 displays an effect command for displaying the second ending image G2 (FIG. 36 (b)) including the ending display image CH11 and the multiple-time image CH13 on the symbol display device 41. do. As a result, the second ending image G2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 over the ending period. Further, the effect execution table for executing the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to displaying the second ending image G2 over the ending period is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By displaying the hold unit image GR corresponding to the number of hold information on the special figure side held and stored, the player can easily recognize the number of hold information on the special figure side held and stored. In addition, since the display mode of the hold unit image GR is set to correspond to the expectation that the hold information on the special figure side corresponding to the hold unit image GR corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the jackpot is set. It is possible to diversify the display mode of the reserved unit image GR in relation to the expected degree of occurrence of the result, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the reserved unit image GR. In this case, the display mode of the predetermined hold unit image GR has a different expectation degree while suggesting that the predetermined hold unit image GR is the target in the situation where the game round is being executed. A display change effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize that there is a possibility of change may be executed. Then, the display mode of the predetermined reserved unit image GR suggested in the display change effect may be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of a jackpot result is higher. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the display mode of the reserved unit image GR will be a display mode with a higher degree of expectation. Furthermore, the display change effect may be executed for a plurality of reserved unit image GRs in one game. As a result, even if the display change effect is executed for one hold unit image GR in one game, the player can execute the display change effect for another hold unit image GR. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the display change effect is executed for the predetermined hold unit image GR in one game, the display mode of the predetermined hold unit image GR is changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher. It may or may not change. As a result, when the display change effect is executed in one game, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the target of the execution is changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher. The player expects that the display will be changed, and it will be possible to increase the player's attention to the display change effect.

When the display change effect is executed in a situation where each of the plurality of hold unit image GRs is individually targeted in one game, the predetermined hold unit image GR among the plurality of hold unit image GRs is While the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is changed to a higher display mode, the display mode of the other reserved unit image GR may not be changed. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display change effect.

When the display change effect is executed in a situation where each of the plurality of hold unit image GRs is individually targeted in one game, each of the plurality of hold unit image GRs is expected to generate a jackpot result. May be changed to a higher display mode. As a result, the player expects that the plurality of reserved unit image GRs are changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher in one game round, and the player's display change effect is changed. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

When "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 and the display change effect is set to be executed, it corresponds to the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state. The display mode that the reserved unit image GR can finally reach is determined. This makes it possible to determine to some extent the content of the display change effect to be executed in the state when the display change effect is set to be executed.

Not only the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed in one game round, but also the game before the special figure side hold information. The hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the start target of the round can also be the target of executing the display change effect. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display change effect.

A plurality of holds corresponding to the special figure side hold information for which the game round is to be started before the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed in one game round. When the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is changed to a higher display mode in each of the unit image GRs, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the above setting generates the jackpot result. It means that it is determined that the display mode corresponding to the above can be reached. As a result, the player expects that the display mode will be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher in each of the plurality of reserved unit image GRs in one game. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the game.

As described above, it corresponds to the special figure side hold information that is the start target of the game round before the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed in one game round. When the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is changed to a higher display mode in each of the plurality of reserved unit image GRs, the display modes are the same. As a result, it is easy for the player to recognize that it is determined that the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the above setting can reach the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. Become.

The hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the display change effect is executed is the suggestion target of the changeability in the configuration in which the changeability is suggested. The display change effect is executed in each of the plurality of game times for the hold unit image GR. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability.

The difference in the number of steps regarding the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result between the current display mode and the display mode that can be finally reached for the reserved unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability is calculated. The difference in the calculated number of stages is the number of game times that is executed until the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the changeability becomes the start target of the game time. If the number of times is greater than the number of times, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, may be a display mode that can be finally reached or a display mode that can be finally reached. It will be changed so that the display mode will be closer. As a result, the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, tends to be a display mode that can be finally reached.

In the state where the display change effect is executed, the promotion execution is won in the promotion execution lottery process (step S1708), so that the pending unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is expected to generate a big hit result. The display mode is changed to a higher degree. This makes it possible to diversify the pattern in which the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is changed toward the display mode that can be finally reached.

When a short period is selected as the display continuation period of the game times, the display change effect is not executed even if the display change effect is executed. This makes it possible to execute the display change effect while not affecting the display duration of the game times. Further, in a situation where the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is not in a display mode that can be finally reached, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR is the start target of the game round. Can be. As a result, even if the display mode that can be finally reached is determined in advance, the degree of freedom in executing the display change effect for the reserved unit image GR, which is the suggestion target of the changeability, is increased. Is possible.

When "1" is set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 and the display change effect is set to be executed, the hold unit image GR to be executed of the display change effect is selected. This makes it possible to determine to some extent the content of the display change effect to be executed in the state when the display change effect is set to be executed.

In the middle of the state in which the display change effect is executed, the hold unit image GR for which the display change effect is executed may be changed. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display change effect.

Even if the display change effect is being executed, if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired, the hold unit image GR to be executed of the display change effect is changed or added. .. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the hold unit image GR even in the situation where the display change effect is already set to be executed.

When the hold unit image GR to be executed of the display change effect is changed or added when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, it is newly acquired. The hold unit image GR corresponding to the hold information on the special figure side is newly suggested as a possibility of change. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the hold unit image GR even in the situation where the display change effect is already set to be executed.

If the display change effect in the game time has not been completed even after the display change effect has already started in one game time, it corresponds to the newly acquired special figure side hold information. The display change effect may be executed for the hold unit image GR. This makes it possible to expect the player to execute the display change effect in response to the subsequent increase in the hold unit image GR even after the display change effect is started in one game. It becomes.

When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the hold corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is obtained. The unit image GR can be a suggestion target of changeability. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the change of the suggestion target of the changeability in the state where the display change effect is executed.

If the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach is already stored, even if the special figure side hold information is newly acquired, the hold unit image that is the target of suggestion of changeability GR does not change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution content from being changed even though the display change effect is executed in an manner in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is high.

When the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is changed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the new changeability is displayed in the display change effect in one game. The display mode may be changed so that the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is higher than the previous display mode by a plurality of steps. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the change of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability.

When the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of changeability is changed, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the suggestion target of the new changeability is displayed in the display change effect in one game. , The display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of the other reserved unit image GR, which is the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is the highest. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the change of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability.

In the game round triggered by the special symbol side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the determination mode of the combination of the stop symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 is that the special symbol side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is reserved. It will be different depending on whether it is memorized or not. As a result, it is possible to stop and display the combination of the stop symbols in a preferable mode in relation to the game situation after the opening / closing execution mode is generated with the current game round as an opportunity.

The hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result may be the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. This allows the player to play the game with confidence that a jackpot result will occur thereafter. In this case, the game times triggered by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result when the notification that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is held and stored is executed. The mode of determining the combination of the stop symbols of the game is different from the mode of determining the combination of the stop symbols of the game round triggered by the special symbol side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result when the notification is not executed. .. As a result, when the notification is executed, it is possible to display the combination of the stop symbols in a preferred mode on the symbol display device 41.

The open / close execution mode occurs when the game round in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed is executed, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the continuous game count is 50 times after the high-frequency support mode. , When the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information stored in the hold is executed in the situation where the game round that triggered the execution of the open / close execution mode is executed and the first big hit result is generated, the game is played. The person may think that he / she could not sufficiently obtain the benefit of the high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 50 times. On the other hand, in the situation where the notification that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is held and stored is executed, at least the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the second big hit result is executed. When a game round triggered by the above is executed, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 at the game round. As a result, even if the game round on the front side is executed and the second jackpot result is actually generated, the player recognizes that the first jackpot result is generated by the content of the combination of the symbols displayed to be stopped. Even if the game round on the rear side is executed and the first jackpot result occurs, the player does not feel that the profit of the second jackpot result could not be sufficiently obtained. It becomes possible.

In the situation where it is notified that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored and stored, the game round is executed triggered by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the second big hit result. If so, not only the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the game, but also the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is displayed as the ending image in the ending period of the open / close execution mode. The third ending image G3 that is not notified is displayed. This makes it possible to make the player recognize that the first jackpot result has occurred even in the situation where the game round on the front side is executed and the second jackpot result is actually generated, and the ending image. In fact, even though the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is 50, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as already described without executing the false notification that the number of continuous games is 25.

In the situation where the hold unit image GR, which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, is displayed, it became an opportunity to start the game round before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. A big hit result may occur in the game times triggered by the special figure side hold information. As a result, when a jackpot result occurs, it is possible to cause an event in which a jackpot result occurs in a game round executed before the game round recognized by the player, which gives the player unexpectedness. Is possible. In addition, in a situation where the player is made aware that a jackpot result will occur in the future, the jackpot result will be additionally generated in the game times executed before the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and the player It is possible to give a great sense of satisfaction to.

In a situation where a plurality of hold information on the special figure side corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored and stored, when the effect of using the hold unit image GR as the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is executed, those multiple features Of the drawing-side hold information, the order that triggers the start of the game round is the display mode in which the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure-side hold information on the rear side corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result, while the start trigger of the game round is The holding unit image GR whose order corresponds to the holding information on the special drawing side on the front side does not have a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. As a result, in a situation where there is a hold unit image GR that is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result, the trigger for starting the game round is prior to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. It is possible to generate many chances that a big hit result will occur as a result of the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information.

In a situation where a plurality of hold information on the special figure side corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored and stored, when the effect of using the hold unit image GR as the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is executed, those multiple special features The holding unit image GR corresponding to one of the drawing-side holding information is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. As a result, in a situation where there is a hold unit image GR that is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result, the trigger for starting the game round is prior to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. It is possible to generate many chances that a big hit result will occur as a result of the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information. In addition, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the hold unit image GR becomes the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and it is valuable that the hold unit image GR becomes the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it.

In a situation where a plurality of hold information on the special figure side corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is stored and stored, when the effect of using the hold unit image GR as the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is executed, those multiple features Among the drawing-side holding information, the holding unit image GR corresponding to the special drawing-side holding information in the order in which the order that triggers the start of the game round is the latest is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. As a result, in a situation where there is a hold unit image GR that is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result, the trigger for starting the game round is prior to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. It is possible to generate many chances that a big hit result will occur as a result of the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information. In addition, in a situation where there is a hold unit image GR that is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result, the trigger for starting the game round is prior to the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR. It is possible to create a situation in which an event in which a jackpot result occurs repeatedly occurs as a result of a game round triggered by the reserved information on the special figure side.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting process of the display change effect executed by the sound / light side MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the display change effect in the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side MPU 82.

When "1" is not set in the display change effect flag of the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S2301: NO), other processing is executed (step S2302). In other processes, the same processes as in steps S1402 to S1413 of the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed.

When "1" is set in the display change effect flag (step S2301: YES), it corresponds to the special figure side hold information acquired this time among the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125. By referring to the presence / absence area of the predetermined reach in the area to be reached, it is determined whether or not the reserved information on the special figure side acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the predetermined reach (step S2303). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2303, by referring to the effect side hold area 125, the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round is reached in advance of the special figure side hold information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not the special figure side reserved information corresponding to the occurrence or the occurrence of the jackpot result exists (step S2304). At the time of the determination, the same process as in step S1403 in the setting process (FIG. 27) of the display change effect of the first embodiment is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2303, it is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information acquired this time corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2305). At the time of the determination, the same process as in step S1501 in the scenario lottery table reading process (FIG. 30) of the first embodiment is executed. When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2305, by referring to the production side holding area 125, the jackpot result is obtained for the special drawing side holding information that is the start target of the game round before the special drawing side holding information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not the special drawing side reserved information corresponding to the occurrence exists (step S2306). In the determination, a process for determining whether or not there is special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result in step S1403 in the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27) of the first embodiment. Performs the same processing as.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2303 and a negative judgment is made in step S2304, or when a positive judgment is made in step S2305 and a negative judgment is made in step S2306, the scenario change shown in steps S2307 to S2310 occurs. Execute the process to make it. The processing contents of these steps S2307 to S2310 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1416 to S1419 of the display change effect setting process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined reach is acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the predetermined reach is set in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102. The scenario in which the display change effect is executed can be changed on condition that the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence or the occurrence of the jackpot result is not reserved and stored. In addition, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit result is acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the special figure holding area 102 to correspond to the occurrence of the big hit result. The scenario in which the display change effect is executed can be changed on condition that the hold information on the drawing side is not stored on hold. As a result, in order to change the scenario in which the display change effect is executed by newly acquiring the special figure side hold information in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display change effect is executed. It is necessary to acquire the special figure side hold information on which the effect having a higher advantage or expectation than the special figure side hold information that triggered the setting of the state is executed. Therefore, the player's expectation when the scenario of the state in which the display change effect is executed is changed by newly acquiring the special figure side hold information in the state where the display change effect is executed is suitably increased. Is possible.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution content of the continuous villa confirmation effect is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

43 (a) to 43 (h) and 44 (a) to 44 (g) are explanatory views for explaining how the continuous villa confirmation effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. In this case, since the six special figure side hold information is reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, six hold unit image GRs are stored in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed. All of these six reserved unit image GRs are displayed in "white", which is the least expected to generate a jackpot result.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, the "3" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, respectively, and in that situation, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Reach display is generated by performing. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image CH21 is displayed in the situation where the reach display is performed. That is, the consecutive villa confirmation effect is generated in the game times. By confirming that the consecutive villa confirmation suggestion image CH21 is displayed, the player is confident that a jackpot result will occur in this game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the "3" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in which the reach line by the "3" symbol is formed, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It will be stopped. That is, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game rounding effect this time. Then, the movement display of the fixed hold change image CH22 is performed in the situation where the same odd number symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the fixed hold change image CH22 reaches the fifth hold unit image GR11 from the left. At the timing, the display mode of the hold unit image GR11 is changed from "white" to "rainbow color" corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and a fixed hold change effect is performed. When the player confirms the fixed hold change effect and the special figure side hold information corresponding to the fifth hold unit image GR11 from the left becomes the start target of the game round, a big hit result is generated in the game round. I'm sure that.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In the current ending period, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the third ending image G3 including the next confirmed image CH14. Further, in the hold display area 41a, a plurality of hold unit image GRs including the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result are displayed.

Here, since the jackpot result that triggered the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is actually 50 times. In this case, a configuration is also conceivable in which the second ending image G2 including the ending display image CH 11 and the multiple image CH 13 is displayed during the ending period. However, after the second ending image G2 is displayed, the first jackpot result is obtained in the game round by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In this case, although the open / close execution mode has occurred, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode is relatively small 25 times even though it was set to 50 times, which is a relatively large number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode. There is a concern that the player will be disappointed that it has become.

On the other hand, in the situation where there is a hold unit image GR that has a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result as described above, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode during the ending period of the open / close execution mode. By displaying the third ending image G3 that does not clearly indicate, it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above. In addition, in order to prevent the situation that the player feels unfortunate as described above, the ending display image is displayed even during the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second big hit result or the third big hit result. A configuration for displaying the first ending image G1 including CH 11 and a small number of image CH 12 is also conceivable. However, in this case, although the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is actually 50, it is notified that the number of continuous games in the high-frequency support mode is 25. On the other hand, by displaying the third ending image G3 that does not clearly indicate the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode, the player is unfortunately as described above without notifying the number of continuous games that is different from the actual one. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 43 (e), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of this game round. , The number of special drawing side hold information stored on hold is five. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR11 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fifth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth. The display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR2 is the same "rainbow color" as the display mode of the fifth hold unit image GR1 in the previous game round.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (f), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

After that, with the start of a new game round, as shown in FIG. 43 (g), as the start of the game round effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41. .. In this case, among the special figure side hold information reserved and stored in the hold area 103 of the special figure hold area 102, the special figure side hold information of the first digestion order is digested as the start target of this game round. , The number of special drawing side hold information stored on hold is four. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR is shifted to the left by one from the end of the previous game round due to the digestion of one piece of hold information on the special figure side. Therefore, in the previous game round, the hold unit image GR11 corresponding to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the fourth in the game round corresponds to the special figure side hold information whose digestion order is the third. The display mode of the third hold unit image GR2 is the same "rainbow color" as the display mode of the fourth hold unit image GR1 in the previous game round.

After that, when the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, the "1" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, respectively, and in that situation, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. Reach display is generated by performing. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (h), the normal confirmation suggestion image CH23 is displayed in the situation where the reach display is performed. That is, a definite effect is usually generated in the game times. By confirming that the confirmation suggestion image CH23 is normally displayed, the player is confident that a jackpot result will occur in this game round.

Here, this game round corresponds to the occurrence of the first big hit result. In the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first big hit result, basically the same combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the situation where the hold unit image GR, which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, is displayed, even if the occurrence of the first jackpot result is supported, the game rounding effect is produced. The same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in. Then, as the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, the normal definite effect that occurs only in the game rounding effect in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the normal final effect is executed.

Further, even when the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the corresponding game rounding effect in which the first big hit result is generated, the open / close execution mode executed with the current game round as a trigger. In the ending period, as will be described later, the third ending image G3 including the ending display image CH11 and the next confirmed image CH14 is displayed, and the holding unit image GR corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is supported. If the reserved information on the special figure side becomes the start target of the game round, a big hit result will occur. As a result, even if the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the subsequent open / close execution mode is actually Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the number of games is 25, when the combination of the same odd number symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is 50 times. It is possible not to confuse the recognizing player.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the "1" symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in which the reach line by the "1" symbol is formed, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed. It will be stopped. That is, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game rounding effect this time. Even in the situation where the hold unit image GR changed to the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by the fixed hold change effect by the continuous villa final effect is displayed, the hold unit is displayed. A big hit result may occur triggered by the special figure side hold information that is the target of starting the game round before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the image GR. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In the current ending period, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the third ending image G3 including the next confirmed image CH14. Further, in the hold display area 41a, a plurality of hold unit image GRs including the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result are displayed.

After that, the game is played twice. In the rear game round of these two game rounds, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), after the variation display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is shown in FIG. 44 (d). As a result, the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, the reach display is not executed in the game rounding effect, and the jackpot result is not generated. Therefore, the combination of symbols corresponding to the complete deviation is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. Further, the hold unit image GR11, which is a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result at the timing when the game round is started, is displayed on the leftmost side.

After that, the game round is started triggered by the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR which is the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (e), as the start of the game rotation effect, the variable display of the symbols is started in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44 (f), the variation display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed. In this case, since the game round this time corresponds to the occurrence of the first big hit result, the combination of the "6" symbols is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 via the reach display. That is, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed as the stop result of the game rounding effect this time.

After that, the open / close execution mode is generated when the big hit result is obtained in this game round, and the ending period is reached when all the round games in the open / close execution mode are completed. In this ending period, as shown in FIG. 44 (g), the symbol display device 41 displays the ending display image CH11 and the first ending image G1 including the small number of times image CH12.

In addition, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR, which has become the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result by executing the fixed hold change effect, is the start target of the game turn, the game turn It is not essential that the first jackpot result occurs in the above, and the second jackpot result may occur or the third jackpot result may occur. If the second big hit result is generated, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and the second ending image G2 is displayed in the ending period of the open / close execution mode. Further, if the third big hit result is generated, the combination of "7" symbols is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and the second ending image G2 is displayed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the continuous villa confirmation effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a setting process of a final effect in the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The setting process of the finalized effect is executed when the reserved information on the special figure side, which is the start target of this game round, corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result.

First, by referring to the hold display area in the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side hold area 125, the hold unit image GR currently displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 is included. It is determined whether or not there is a hold unit image GR that has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2401). If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the processes of steps S2402 to S2412 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2402 to S2412 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2002 to S2012 of the final effect setting process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. In this case, in steps S2409 to S2412, the process related to the execution setting of the normal final effect is executed. Specifically, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the occurrence of the first big hit result, and if it corresponds to the occurrence of the first big hit result, the setting of the final decision effect as it is. When the process is completed and the generation of the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result is supported, the process for generating the normal final effect in steps S2410 to S2412 is executed.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the process for generating the normal final effect in steps S2410 to S2412 is executed without executing the process of step S2409. That is, in step S2410, the execution lottery process of the normal final effect is executed. In the execution lottery process of the normal confirmation effect, the execution lottery table of the normal confirmation effect is read from the sound light side ROM 83 to the sound light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the execution lottery of the normal confirmation effect that is periodically updated in the sound / light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Match against the table. Execution of normal confirmed effect The probability of winning the execution of normal confirmed effect in the lottery process is constant at 40%, but it is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot result that occurs in this game round. Depending on the situation, the probability of winning the execution of the consecutive villa confirmation effect may be different.

Execution of normal confirmation effect When the execution is won in the lottery process (step S2411: YES), the normal confirmation effect information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84 (step S2412). When the normal confirmation information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, it corresponds to the execution of the display effect in which the normal confirmation suggestion image CH23 is displayed in the effect execution table read process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). The effect execution table is read out to the sound / light side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

By executing the process as described above, basically, the finalized effect is not normally executed in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first jackpot result, but the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result (“rainbow”). In the situation where the hold unit image GR of "color") is displayed, a normal definite effect can be executed regardless of the type of the jackpot result in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the normal final effect is executed. Further, in the situation where the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed, the jackpot result is displayed in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. Even if the type is the first jackpot result, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if the normal definite effect occurs in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first big hit result, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, so that the normal definite effect occurs. In this case, it is possible not to confuse the player who recognizes that the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol determination process in the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The stop symbol determination process is executed in step S1206 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21) that is executed at the start of the game rotation effect.

If the game times this time do not correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2501: NO), other processing is executed (step S2502). The processing content of the other processing is the same as step S2102 of the stop symbol determination processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

When the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2501: YES), whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in the current game round production, or the first of the production side holding area 125. By referring to the hold display area in the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h, the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result. It is determined whether or not GR exists (step S2503). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the processes of steps S2506 to S2512 are executed. The processing content of steps S2506 to S2512 is the same as the processing content of steps S2106 to S2112 of the stop symbol determination process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the odd-numbered symbol lottery process is executed (step S2504). In the odd-numbered symbol lottery process, the odd-numbered symbol lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. Then, the numerical information is acquired from the random number counter for the symbol lottery that is periodically updated in the sound light side RAM 84, and the acquired numerical information is collated with the odd number symbol lottery table read out to the sound light side RAM 84. As a result, the type of the odd-numbered symbols in the case where the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the current game round is determined by lottery, and the lines L1 to L5 in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed are displayed. It will be decided by lottery. However, the odd-numbered symbols selected in the lottery do not include the "7" symbol.

After that, the odd-numbered symbol information corresponding to the type of the same odd-numbered symbol combination determined by the odd-numbered symbol lottery process and the types of lines L1 to L5 in which the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed is transmitted to the sound light side RAM 84. Store (step S2505). When the odd-numbered symbol information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84, the effect execution table corresponding to the stored odd-numbered symbol information is sound-lighted in the effect execution table read-out process in step S1207 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21). It is read out to the side RAM 84. Further, the effect command corresponding to the effect execution table is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 in step S1107 in the effect control process for game rounds (FIG. 20).

As described above, the hold unit image GR in the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed in the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the hold unit image GR. If the player recognizes that a jackpot result will be generated by starting the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information, or if the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed, the jackpot result will be displayed. Even if the type is the first big hit result, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect. Then, as described above, in the game rounding effect in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed, a normal definite effect can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the normal final effect is executed.

Further, even when the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the corresponding game rounding effect in which the first big hit result is generated, the open / close execution mode executed with the current game round as a trigger. During the ending period, the third ending image G3 including the ending display image CH11 and the next confirmed image CH14 is displayed, and the special figure side hold corresponding to the hold unit image GR, which is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. If the information is the target for starting the game, a jackpot result will occur. As a result, even if the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect corresponding to the occurrence of the first jackpot result, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the subsequent open / close execution mode is actually Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the number of games is 25, when the combination of the same odd number symbols is stopped and displayed, the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is 50 times. It is possible not to confuse the recognizing player.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the stop symbol determination process executed by the sound / light side MPU 82 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol determination process in the present embodiment executed by the sound / light side MPU 82. The stop symbol determination process is executed in step S1206 of the effect determination process (FIG. 21) that is executed at the start of the game rotation effect.

If the game times this time do not correspond to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2601: NO), other processing is executed (step S2602). The processing content of the other processing is the same as step S2102 of the stop symbol determination processing (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

When the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result (step S2601: YES), whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in the current game round production, or the first of the production side holding area 125. By referring to the hold display area in the 1st to 8th unit areas 125a to 125h, the hold display area 41a of the symbol display device 41 has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot result. It is determined whether or not GR exists (step S2603). If a negative determination is made in step S2603, the processes of steps S2609 to S2615 are executed. The processing content of steps S2609 to S2615 is the same as the processing content of steps S2106 to S2112 of the stop symbol determination process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2603, if the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed in the current game rounding effect, the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result in the confirmed hold change effect in the consecutive villa confirmed effect. It is determined whether or not the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR changed to (“rainbow color”) corresponds to the first jackpot result (step S2604). In addition, if there is already a hold unit image GR that has a display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR is the first. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to one jackpot result (step S2604).

In the present embodiment, when it is specified in the advance identification process (FIG. 13) in the main MPU 62 that the newly acquired special figure side reserved information corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result, the jackpot result is obtained. The type of is also specified, and the first hold command and the second hold command are transmitted including the information of the specified type of jackpot result. Further, a type area for a jackpot result is set in each of the first to eighth unit areas 125a to 125h of the effect side holding area 125. If the first hold command or the second hold command contains information on the type of jackpot result, the information on the type of jackpot result is the jackpot result in the unit areas 125a to 125h corresponding to the hold command received this time. Type Set in the area.

Corresponds to the hold unit image GR which is the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the hold unit image GR which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result when a negative determination is made in step S2604. When the reserved information on the special symbol side corresponds to the occurrence of the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result, the odd-numbered symbol lottery process is executed in step S2605, and the result of the odd-numbered symbol lottery process in step S2606. The odd-numbered symbol information corresponding to is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. The processing contents of these steps S2605 and S2606 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2109 and S2110 of the stop symbol determination process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. As a result, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect this time.

Corresponds to the hold unit image GR which is the display mode (“rainbow color”) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the hold unit image GR which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2604. When the special symbol side reserved information corresponds to the occurrence of the first jackpot result, the even-numbered symbol lottery process is executed in step S2607, and the even-numbered symbol corresponding to the result of the even-numbered symbol lottery process in step S2608. The information is stored in the sound / light side RAM 84. The processing contents of steps S2607 and S2608 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2111 and S2112 of the stop symbol determination process (FIG. 40) in the first embodiment. As a result, the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect this time.

According to the above configuration, the special figure side hold corresponding to the hold unit image GR corresponding to the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result (“rainbow color”) or the hold unit image GR corresponding to the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. When the information corresponds to the occurrence of the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result, the type of the jackpot result in the game rounding production corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result started before the reserved information on the special figure side. Regardless of, the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols other than the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the display mode ("rainbow color") corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is the hold unit image GR or the display corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR, which is an embodiment, corresponds to the occurrence of the first jackpot result, the game corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result started before the special figure side hold information. In the diversion effect, the same combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the jackpot result. As a result, the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed more often, and even though the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed and a jackpot result occurs, it is held and stored at that point. It is possible to make it difficult for the event that the first big hit result occurs in the game times corresponding to the reserved information on the special figure side.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

(1) When the display change effect is executed in the game round, the display mode of the hold unit image GR that is the target of the execution of the display change effect may be surely changed. That is, the display change suggestion image CH1 may stop at a position above the predetermined holding unit image GR, and the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 may be changed from the initial display mode of "change". When the display mode is changed to the display mode "change?", The predetermined holding unit image GR may be configured to be changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is surely higher. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the display change effect will be executed in each game.

(2) Even if the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed in the game round, only the display change suggestion image CH1 is moved and displayed, and the display change suggestion image CH1 is stopped at a position above the predetermined holding unit image GR and displayed. The configuration may be such that the event that the display mode of the change suggestion image CH1 is changed may not occur. In this case, when the display change suggestion image CH1 is displayed, the display change suggestion image CH1 first stops at a position above any of the reserved unit images GR, and the display mode of the display change suggestion image CH1 is changed. As a result, the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the target of executing the display change effect, is changed to a display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher. The player will expect that.

(3) When the display mode of the hold unit image GR on which the display change effect is executed is changed, the display mode is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher. When the display mode of the reserved unit image GR is changed, the display mode may be changed so that the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is low.

(4) In addition to the configuration in which the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result is notified by the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, the configuration may be configured in which the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result with higher advantage is also notified. For example, as the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, there are a plurality of types of display modes corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, and in the case of the first display mode, the first jackpot result, the second jackpot result, and the third jackpot result are displayed. It is notified that any of the jackpot results will occur, and in the case of the second display mode, it is notified that either the second jackpot result or the third jackpot result will occur, which is the third display mode. In some cases, the configuration may be such that it is notified that the third big hit result will occur.

(5) The configuration is not limited to the state in which the display change effect is executed when the special drawing side hold information is newly acquired, and the game round is newly started. The configuration may be set so that the display change effect is executed. In this case, among the reserved unit image GRs corresponding to the special figure side reserved information stored at that time when a new game round is started, the reserved unit image GR that is the target of suggestion of changeability is selected by lottery. It may be a configuration to be determined, or a configuration in which the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information having the latest start trigger of the game round is set as the suggestion target of the possibility of change.

(6) In the state where the display change effect is executed, the hold unit image GR for which the display change effect is executed may be determined by lottery in each game. In this case, whether or not to change the display mode in the display change effect and the display mode according to the content of the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR selected as the target for executing the display change effect. In the case of changing the display mode, it may be configured to determine how many levels of the display mode should be changed with respect to the expected degree of occurrence of the jackpot result. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the display change effect.

(7) In a situation where the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is not the display mode that can be finally reached, which is determined at the start of the state in which the display change effect is executed. , When the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information, which is the digestion order one time before the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR, is started, the hold unit image GR The display mode may be configured to be reliably changed to a display mode that can be finally reached.

(8) When the special figure side hold information triggers the start of the game round, the display of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information is terminated. The holding unit image GR corresponding to the holding information on the drawing side may also be configured to continue displaying. In addition, the display mode of the hold unit image GR corresponding to the special figure side hold information that is the trigger for the start of the game round in the configuration is changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher in the middle of the game round. It may be a possible configuration. In this case, it is possible to increase the chances that the display mode of the reserved unit image GR is changed to the display mode in which the expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result is higher.

In this configuration, the display mode of the hold unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, is not the display mode that can be finally reached, which is determined at the start of the state in which the display change effect is executed. When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the hold unit image GR triggers the start of the game round, the display mode of the hold unit image GR can finally be reached in the middle of the game round. The configuration may be changed to the embodiment. This makes it possible to make the display mode of the reserved unit image GR, which is the target of suggestion of changeability, a display mode that can be finally reached.

(9) In the state where the display change effect is executed, the display change effect may be executed in each game time regardless of the display continuation period of the game times. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the display change effect is executed. In addition, since there are few elements that change the execution content of the display change effect in the configuration, when setting the state in which the display change effect is executed, all the execution contents of the display change effect in the state are determined in advance. It may be configured as such.

(10) Execution of the display change effect when the execution content (that is, the scenario) of the display change effect is changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed. The reserved unit image GR that is the target of the above may be changed. In addition, if the execution content (that is, the scenario) of the display change effect is changed when the special figure side hold information is newly acquired in the state where the display change effect is executed, the display change effect is displayed until then. While the hold unit image GR that was the target of execution is maintained as the target for executing the display change effect, the hold unit image GR corresponding to the newly acquired special figure side hold information is the target for executing the display change effect. It may be a configuration added as.

(11) The trigger for changing the execution content (that is, the scenario) of the display change effect while the display change effect is executed is not limited to the newly acquired special figure side hold information, for example. The execution content of the display change effect may be changed when the game times for which the predetermined display continuation period is executed are executed, and the display change effect may be changed when the predetermined reach display is executed in the game times. The execution content of may be changed.

(12) When the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach is reserved and stored, the special figure side hold information is newly acquired while the display change effect is executed. However, the configuration is such that the execution content (that is, the scenario) of the display change effect is not changed, but the configuration is not limited to this and may be a configuration that can be changed. In this case, when the special figure side hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result or the occurrence of the predetermined reach is held and stored, the execution content of the display change effect is higher than the case where the special figure side hold information is not held and stored. May be configured to reduce the probability that

(13) In the display change effect, the display change suggestion image CH1 is moved horizontally along the hold display area 41a and displayed at a position above the hold unit image GR which is a dummy target or a suggestion target of changeability. The configuration is such that the change suggestion image CH1 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the initial display mode is changed to the changeable display mode. The specific production content is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize which is the pending unit image GR to be suggested. For example, the display change effect may be performed by a roulette-type effect, or may be performed by a card game-type effect. Further, in the configuration in which the holding unit image GR corresponding to the holding information on the special figure side in which the digestion order of the game times is earlier is displayed on the right side, the display change suggestion image CH1 is moved to the left from the upper position of the holding unit image GR at the right end. It may be configured to be moved and displayed toward.

(14) A configuration in which the reserved unit image GR can be set as a suggestion target of changeability in the display change effect, provided that the display mode at the start of display of the reserved unit image GR is "white" or "blue". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the hold unit image GR has a display mode of "yellow" or higher in the expected degree of occurrence of a jackpot result, it is set as a suggestion target of changeability in the display change effect. It may be a configuration to obtain.

(15) The configuration is set so that the display change effect is executed on condition that the number of reserved information on the special drawing side is 3 or more, but the configuration is not limited to this. , Even if the number of reserved information on the special figure side that is stored on hold is two, the display change effect may be set to be executed, and the number of reserved information on the special figure side that is stored on hold may be set. The configuration may be set so that the display change effect is executed on condition that the number is 4 or more.

(16) Corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result regardless of whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed and whether or not there is a hold unit image GR that is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In a situation where the special figure side hold information is held and stored, if a jackpot result occurs in the game times executed before the game times triggered by the special figure side hold information, it is executed first. As the stop symbol of the symbol display device 41 in the game times to be played, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the first embodiment, and the same odd-numbered symbol combination is displayed in the third embodiment. It may be configured to be stopped and displayed. Further, in the configuration, the jackpot result is generated regardless of whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed and whether or not there is a hold unit image GR that is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. If the jackpot result occurs in the game times executed before the game times triggered by the special figure side hold information in the situation where the special figure side hold information corresponding to is stored in hold, the relevant In the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the third ending image G3 may be displayed in which the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after that is not specified.

(17) Corresponds to the occurrence of the jackpot result regardless of whether or not the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed and whether or not there is a hold unit image GR that is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result. In a situation where the special figure side hold information is held and stored, if a jackpot result occurs in a game round executed before the game round triggered by the special figure side hold information, the jackpot result is displayed. In the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the configuration, the third ending image G3 may be displayed in which the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after that is not specified.

(18) The third jackpot result is the third jackpot result even when the game round in which the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed or the holding unit image GR which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result exists. If it occurs, the combination of "7" symbols may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the third ending image G3 may be displayed or the second ending image G2 may be displayed during the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode thereafter.

(19) The special figure side hold information is started in the case of a game time in which the consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed, or in the situation where the hold unit image GR having the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result exists. If a jackpot result occurs in a game round executed before the game round that triggers the game, either the same even-numbered symbol combination or the same odd-numbered symbol combination is used as the stop symbol of the symbol display device 41. However, a combination of dedicated symbols that do not correspond to the above may be stopped and displayed. The combination of the dedicated symbols is arbitrary, but it is preferable to use a combination of symbols that is not stopped and displayed in the game times that do not result in a big hit.

(20) The display of the hold unit image GR is not limited to the configuration in which the display of the hold unit image GR is continued even in the open / close execution mode, and the display of the hold unit image GR is temporarily interrupted when the open / close execution mode is started. May be good. In this case, the display of the hold unit image GR is restarted after the open / close execution mode ends. At the time of this resumption, the display mode of the hold unit image GR before the opening / closing execution mode is started may be inherited or may not be inherited. If the open / close execution mode occurs in a situation where the hold unit image GR, which is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, is present in the configuration to be inherited, the jackpot is hit after the end of the open / close execution mode. The display of the hold unit image GR is restarted in the situation where the hold unit image GR that is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the result exists.

(21) In a situation where the hold unit image GR, which is a display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result, is not displayed in the game round in which the consecutive villa confirmation effect is not executed, the game round in which the second jackpot result is generated. The combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is not limited to the configuration in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is reliably stopped and displayed, and either the same odd-numbered symbol combination or the same even-numbered symbol combination is used in the game times in which the second big hit result occurs. May be configured to be stopped and displayed. In the game times when the first big hit result occurs, the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the same odd-numbered symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the player We expect it to be the result of the second big hit. Further, in the configuration, when the same even-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the second jackpot result, the occurrence of the second jackpot result is dealt with in the subsequent open / close execution mode. It may be configured to be notified that it is.

In the above configuration, even in the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the second big hit result, if the combination of the same even-numbered symbols is not stopped and displayed, the normal confirmation effect may not be executed. In this case, the normal confirmation effect is executed only in the game times in which the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, when the configuration is applied to the third embodiment, it corresponds to the occurrence of the first jackpot result in the situation where the hold unit image GR which is the display mode corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result is displayed. When the combination of the same odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the game times due to the execution of the game times to be performed, the normal definite effect may be executed in the game times. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the normal final effect is executed while maintaining the rule that the same odd-numbered symbol combination is stopped and displayed when the normal final effect is executed.

(22) The type of combination of symbols that is stopped and displayed in the game rotation effect of the symbol display device 41 is changed depending on the difference in the number of continuous games in the high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode, but the configuration is limited to this. If the number of continuous games in the high-probability mode after the open / close execution mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result, the effect for game rotation in the symbol display device 41 is due to the difference in the number of continuous games in the high-probability mode. It may be configured to change the type of combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed at, and if the number of round games in the open / close execution mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result, the symbol display device depends on the difference in the number of round games. The type of the combination of the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect in 41 may be changed.

(23) The special figure side hold information is digested according to the order in which it was acquired, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the first special figure side hold information and the second special figure side hold information is The other may be preferentially digested regardless of the acquisition order. For example, when the second special figure side reserved information is reserved and stored, even if the first special figure side reserved information acquired prior to the second special figure side reserved information is reserved and stored, the second special figure side is reserved. The information on hold on the drawing side may be preferentially digested. Further, for example, when the first special figure side hold information is held and stored, even if the second special figure side hold information acquired prior to the first special figure side hold information is held and stored, the first (1) The reserved information on the special figure side may be preferentially digested.

(24) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 80 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 60, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 60. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the voice emission control device 80 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(25) The device on which the game rotation effect is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured such that the game rotation effect is executed by operating a movable decorative member. Often, the game rotation effect may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the game rotation effect may be executed by a combination of all or a part of each of the above embodiments.

(26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. Or, after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as paying out a medal is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the main body of the gaming machine supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is equipped with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (step S309 to step in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. Function to execute the processing of S311) and
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, and the game round operation is performed in each game round. (A function to execute the effect control process for the game round in the sound light side MPU 82) and the game round control means.
Setting of the special unit display control means (holding effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the number of special unit display (holding unit image GR) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
A plurality of types of display modes of the special unit display are set according to the expectation that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information.
This gaming machine is
The display mode of the predetermined special unit display is changed to the display mode having the expected degree different from the state in which it is suggested that the predetermined special unit display is targeted in the situation where the game rounding operation is executed. Execution of the effect execution means (start processing of the display change effect in the sound light side MPU 82) to execute the changeability effect (display change effect) that enables the player to recognize that there is a possibility of being performed. Function to perform and function to execute display change effect processing),
As the changeability effect, a mode changing means (sound / light side MPU 82) for making the display mode of the predetermined special unit display, which is the target of execution of the changeability effect, into a display mode having different expectations. (Functions for executing the processes of step S1710, step S1713, step S1716, and step S1721) in
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the changeability effect can be executed for a plurality of the special unit displays in one gaming round.

According to the feature A1, the player recognizes the number of special information stored on hold by displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It becomes easier to do. In addition, by setting multiple types of display modes for the special unit display according to the expectation that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant support information, the privilege can be granted. It is possible to diversify the display mode of the special unit display while relating it to the degree of expectation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special unit display.

In this case, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display is changed to a display mode having a different expectation degree while suggesting that the predetermined special unit display is targeted in the situation where the game round is being executed. A changeability effect may be performed that allows the player to recognize that there is a possibility. Then, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display suggested in the changeability effect may be actually changed to a display mode having a different degree of expectation. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the display mode of the special unit display will be a display mode with a higher degree of expectation.

Furthermore, the changeability effect may be executed for a plurality of special unit displays in one game. As a result, even if the changeability effect is executed for one special unit display in one game, the player can execute the changeability effect for another special unit display. You will expect it. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the changeability effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. As the changeability effect, a means (step in the sound / light side MPU 82) for preventing the display mode of the predetermined special unit display, which is the target of execution of the changeability effect, from being a display mode having different expectations. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it has a function of making a negative determination in S1709 and a function of executing the process of step S1724).

According to the feature A2, even if the changeability effect is executed for a predetermined special unit display, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display may be changed to a display mode having a different degree of expectation. It may not be done. As a result, when the changeability effect is executed, the player expects that the display mode of the special unit display that is the target of the execution is changed to the display mode with higher expectation. , It is possible to increase the player's attention to the changeability effect.

Feature A3.1 When the changeability effect is executed for a plurality of the special unit displays in the game times, the expectation level for the predetermined special unit display among the plurality of the special unit displays. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein is changed to a different display mode, while a situation may occur in which the expected degree is not changed to a different display mode for another special unit display.

According to the feature A3, in the changeability effect in one game, the predetermined special unit display is changed to the display mode having different expectations, while the other special unit displays are not changed to the display mode having different expectations. Sometimes. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the changeability effect.

Feature A4.1 When the changeability effect is executed for a plurality of the special unit displays in one game round, the display mode is changed so that the expected degree is different for each of the plurality of the special unit displays. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, characterized in that the situation described above may occur.

According to the feature A4, each of the plurality of special unit displays may be changed to a different display mode in the changeability effect in one game round. As a result, the player expects that the display mode of the plurality of special units will be changed to the display mode with higher expectation in one game round, and the player's attention to the changeability effect will be increased. Is possible.

Feature A5. Based on the acquisition of the special information by the information acquisition means, the state setting means for setting the changeable state into an executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed (the setting process of the display change effect in the sound light side MPU 82 is executed. Function) and
A mode determining means (in the sound light side MPU 82) for determining a reachable mode, which is a display mode in which the special unit display corresponding to the trigger corresponding to the special information that triggered the setting of the executable state can be finally reached. (Function to execute the process of step S1411 to step S1413) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A4, characterized in that

According to the feature A5, when the executable state is set, the reachable mode in which the special unit display corresponding to the trigger corresponding to the special information that triggered the setting can be finally reached is determined. This makes it possible to determine to some extent the content of the changeability effect to be executed in the executable state when the executable state is set.

Feature A6.1 The special unit display corresponding to the front side corresponding to the special information in which the order of starting the game round is earlier than the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponding to the opportunity in the game round. The gaming machine according to the feature A5, which is also characterized in that it can be the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

According to feature A6, it is possible to change not only the special unit display corresponding to the opportunity in one game round, but also the special unit display corresponding to the front side corresponding to the special information that is the start target of the game round before that. Since it can be the target of the execution of the changeability effect, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the changeability effect.

Feature A7. The mode changing means is a special unit corresponding to a plurality of front sides in one game round, based on the fact that a display mode in which the expectation degree is equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree is determined as the reachable mode. Each of the displays is characterized by being provided with a plurality of changing means (a function of executing the process of step S1716 in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the expected degree is changed to a display mode different from the previous display modes. The gaming machine according to the feature A6.

According to the feature A7, when each of the plurality of front-side corresponding special unit displays is changed to a display mode in which the expectation degree is different from the previous display mode in one game round, the special unit corresponding to the opportunity is changed. The display means that the display mode in which the expected degree is equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree is determined as the reachable mode. As a result, the player expects that each of the plurality of front-side-corresponding special unit displays will be changed to a display mode in which the expected degree is different from the previous display mode in one game round, and the display mode can be changed. It is possible to increase the player's attention to sexual production.

Feature A8. When the plurality of changing means is to be changed to a display mode in which the expected degree is different in each of the plurality of special unit displays corresponding to the front side in one game round, the special unit display corresponding to the front side thereof. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the display modes of the above are all changed to the same display mode.

According to the feature A8, when the display mode that is equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree is determined as the reachable mode of the special unit display corresponding to the opportunity, the special unit display corresponding to a plurality of front sides is displayed in one game. All are changed to the same display mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the display mode that is equal to or higher than the predetermined expected degree is determined as the reachable mode of the special unit display corresponding to the opportunity.

Feature A9. The effect execution means is described in any one of the features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that the changeability effect can be executed for the same special unit display in each of the plurality of game times. Gaming machine.

According to the feature A9, since the changeability effect can be executed for the same special unit display in each of the plurality of game times, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special unit display.

Feature A10. A mode determining means for determining a reachable mode, which is a display mode corresponding to the expectation that the same special unit display can finally reach (a function of executing the processes of steps S1411 to S1413 in the sound light side MPU 82). Equipped with
The mode changing means is
Difference specifying means for specifying the difference in the number of steps regarding the degree of expectation between the current display mode and the reachable mode for the same special unit display (function of executing the process of step S1707 in the sound light side MPU 82). When,
When the difference specified by the difference specifying means is larger than the number of times of the game times executed until the special information corresponding to the same special unit display becomes the start target of the game times. Means for making the display mode of the same special unit display the reachable mode or the display mode in which the number of steps related to the expectation level approaches the reachable mode (function for executing the process of step S1713 in the sound light side MPU 82). When,
The gaming machine according to the feature A9, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature A10, the difference in the number of steps regarding the degree of expectation between the current display mode and the reachable mode for the same special unit display is the special information corresponding to the same special unit display. If the number of game rounds to be executed before the start target is larger than the number of times, the display mode of the same special unit display becomes the reachable mode, or the number of steps related to the expectation level approaches the reachable mode. It is changed to be a mode. As a result, the display mode of the same special unit display tends to be a reachable mode.

Feature A11. The mode changing means is
A mode change lottery means (in the sound light side MPU 82) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the same special unit display by lottery in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not the reachable mode. (Function to execute the process of step S1708) and
When it is determined by the mode change lottery means to change the display mode of the same special unit display, the means for changing the display mode of the same special unit display (process of step S1710 in the sound light side MPU 82 is executed. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature A10, which is characterized by the above.

According to the feature A11, it is possible to diversify the pattern in which the display mode of the same special unit display is changed toward the reachable mode.

Feature A12. Means for preventing the changeability effect from being executed when the execution period of the game times corresponds to the effect non-executable period even in the executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed (sound light side). It has a function to make a negative judgment in step S1701 in MPU82).
The feature A10 or A11 characterized in that the special information corresponding to the same special unit display can be the start target of the game round in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not the reachable mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A12, when the execution period of the game round is the non-executable period, the changeability effect is not executed even in the executable state. This makes it possible to execute the changeability effect while not affecting the execution period of the game times. Further, in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not a reachable mode, the special information corresponding to the same special unit display may be the start target of the game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in executing the changeability effect for the same special unit display even if the reachable mode is determined in advance.

Feature A13. Means for preventing the changeability effect from being executed when the execution period of the game times corresponds to the effect non-executable period even in the executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed (sound light side). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, which comprises a function of making a negative determination in step S1701 in the MPU 82).

According to the feature A13, when the execution period of the game round is the non-executable period, the changeability effect is not executed even in the executable state. This makes it possible to execute the changeability effect while not affecting the execution period of the game times.

Feature A14. A state setting means (a function for executing a display change effect setting process in the sound / light side MPU 82) for setting an executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed based on the execution condition is satisfied.
Target selection means (step S1410, step S1608, and step S1612 in the sound light side MPU 82) for selecting the special unit display that is the target of executing the changeability effect when the state setting means sets the executable state. Function to execute the processing of) and
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A13, characterized in that

According to the feature A14, since the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect is selected when it is set to the executable state, it is executed in the executable state when it is set to the executable state. It is possible to determine the content of the effect to some extent.

Feature A15. Equipped with a target change means (a function to execute a scenario change process in the sound light side MPU 82) for adding or changing the special unit display that is the target of executing the changeability effect based on the establishment of the change condition. The gaming machine according to feature A14, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature A15, the special unit display for which the changeability effect is executed may be changed. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the changeability effect.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state.

According to the feature A16, the special unit display to be executed of the changeability effect may be changed as the number of display of the special unit display increases in the executable state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the special unit display even in the situation where the executable state is already set.

Feature A17. When the change condition is satisfied by newly acquiring the special information by the information acquisition means in the executable state, the target changing means displays the special unit corresponding to the newly acquired special information. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the machine is subject to the execution of the changeability effect.

According to the feature A17, as the number of special unit displays increases in the executable state, the increased special unit display may be the target of the changeability effect. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the special unit display even in the situation where the executable state is already set.

Feature A18. The effect executing means is specially described by the information acquisition means in a situation where the changeability effect is started in one game round and the changeability effect is not completed in the game round. When the change condition is satisfied by newly acquiring the information, the changeability effect for the special unit display corresponding to the newly acquired special information can be executed in the game times. The gaming machine according to feature A17, which comprises means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1906 and S1908 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature A18, even after the changeability effect has already started in one game round, if the changeability effect in the game round has not ended, it is newly acquired. A changeability effect may be executed for the special unit display corresponding to the special information. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to execute the changeability effect for the subsequent increase in the special unit display even after the changeability effect is started in one game. It will be possible.

Feature A19. One of the features A16 to A18, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A19, when the special unit display for which the changeability effect is executed is added or changed in the executable state, the newly acquired special information may correspond to the grant of the privilege. be. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect in the executable state.

Feature A20. The change condition is satisfied based on the newly acquired special information in which the predetermined reach display is executed by the information acquisition means in the game rotation operation in the executable state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A16 to A19.

According to the feature A20, when the special unit display for which the changeability effect is executed is added or changed in the executable state, or when the newly acquired special information becomes the start target of the game round. A given reach display may occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect in the executable state.

Feature A21. When the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the change condition is not satisfied even if the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A20, characterized in that it is provided with a means for making the sound and light side MPU 82 affirmatively determined in the process of step S1415.

According to the feature A21, when the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is already stored, even if the special information is newly acquired, the target for executing the changeability effect is not added or changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution content from being changed even though the changeability effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Feature A22. When the acquired information storage means stores the special information for which a predetermined reach display is executed in the game rotation operation, the special information is newly added by the information acquisition means in the executable state. 1 The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature A22, when the special information corresponding to the predetermined reach display is already stored, even if the special information is newly acquired, the target for executing the changeability effect is not added or changed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution content from being changed even though the changeability effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Feature A23. When the special unit display to be executed by the changeability effect selected by the target selection means is added or changed by the target change means, the mode change means newly performs the changeability effect. A means for changing the display mode of the special unit display to be executed to a display mode in which the expected degree is a plurality of steps higher than the previous display mode in the changeability effect once. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A22, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S1713 and S1906 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature A23, when the special unit display that is the target of the changeability effect is added or changed, the display mode of the special unit display that is the target of the new changeability effect is displayed. One changeability The display mode can be changed to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the previous display mode by a plurality of steps in the effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

Feature A24. When the special unit display to be executed by the changeability effect selected by the target selection means is added or changed by the target change means, the mode change means newly performs the changeability effect. The display mode of the special unit display to be executed is the same as the display mode of the other special unit display having the highest expectation in the changeability effect once. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A23, which comprises means for changing the embodiment (a function of executing the processing of step S1713 and step S1906 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature A24, when the special unit display that is the target of the changeability effect is added or changed, the display mode of the special unit display that is the target of the new changeability effect is displayed. In one changeability effect, the display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of the other special unit display, which is the display mode with the highest expectation. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

Feature A25. When a plurality of the special unit displays are displayed, the plurality of special unit displays are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction.
The effect executing means is in the direction in which the plurality of special unit displays are displayed side by side in the game times in the state where the changeability effect is executed, and the order in which the game times are started is earlier. The change suggestion image (display change suggestion image CH1) is moved and displayed from the special unit display side corresponding to the special information to the special unit display side corresponding to the special information in which the order of starting the game round is late. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the feature A25, when a plurality of special unit displays are displayed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which special unit display is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features A1 to A25, one or more of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (step S309 to step in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. Function to execute the processing of S311) and
Setting of the special unit display control means (holding effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the number of special unit display (holding unit image GR) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
A plurality of types of display modes of the special unit display are set according to the expectation that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information.
This gaming machine is
A state setting means (a function to execute the setting process of the display change effect in the sound light side MPU 82) for setting the executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed based on the execution condition is satisfied.
Target selection means (step S1410, step S1608, and step S1612 in the sound light side MPU 82) for selecting the special unit display that is the target of executing the changeability effect when the state setting means sets the executable state. Function to execute the processing of) and
The display mode of the predetermined special unit display is such that it is suggested that the predetermined special unit display selected as the target for executing the changeability effect in the feasible state is the target. An effect execution means (sound light side) for executing a changeability effect (display change effect) that enables the player to recognize that the display mode may be changed to a different display mode having the expected degree. A function to execute the start processing of the display change effect and a function to execute the process for the display change effect in the MPU 82), and
As the changeability effect, a mode changing means (sound / light side MPU 82) for making the display mode of the predetermined special unit display, which is the target of execution of the changeability effect, into a display mode having different expectations. (Functions for executing the processes of step S1710, step S1713, step S1716, and step S1721) in
The target changing means (function for executing the scenario change processing in the sound light side MPU 82) for adding or changing the special unit display that is the target of executing the changeability effect based on the establishment of the change condition, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the player recognizes the number of special information stored on hold by displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It becomes easier to do. In addition, as the display mode of the special unit display, a privilege is given by setting a plurality of types of special information corresponding to the special unit display according to the expectation that the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information. It is possible to diversify the display mode of the special unit display while relating it to the degree of expectation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special unit display.

In this case, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display is changed to a display mode having a different expectation degree while suggesting that the predetermined special unit display is targeted in the situation where the game round is being executed. A changeability effect may be performed that allows the player to recognize that there is a possibility. Then, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display suggested in the changeability effect may be actually changed to a display mode having a different degree of expectation. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the display mode of the special unit display will be a display mode with a higher degree of expectation.

In addition, since the special unit display that is the target of execution of the changeability effect is selected when it is set to the executable state, the changeability to be executed in the executable state when it is set to the executable state. It is possible to determine the content of the production to some extent. In addition, the special unit display that is the target of executing the changeability effect may be added or changed. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the changeability effect.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state.

According to the feature B2, the special unit display to be executed of the changeability effect may be changed as the number of display of the special unit display increases in the executable state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the special unit display even in the situation where the executable state is already set.

Feature B3. When the change condition is satisfied by newly acquiring the special information by the information acquisition means in the executable state, the target changing means displays the special unit corresponding to the newly acquired special information. The gaming machine according to the feature B2, wherein the player is subject to the execution of the changeability effect.

According to the feature B3, as the number of special unit displays increases in the executable state, the increased special unit display may be the target of the changeability effect. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the increase in the special unit display even in the situation where the executable state is already set.

Feature B4. The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, and the game round operation is performed in each game round. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function to execute an effect control process for the game turn in the sound light side MPU 82).
The effect executing means is specially described by the information acquisition means in a situation where the changeability effect is started in one game round and the changeability effect is not completed in the game round. When the change condition is satisfied by newly acquiring the information, the changeability effect for the special unit display corresponding to the newly acquired special information can be executed in the game times. The gaming machine according to feature B3, which comprises means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1906 and S1908 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature B4, even after the changeability effect has already started in one game round, if the changeability effect in the game round has not ended, it is newly acquired. A changeability effect may be executed for the special unit display corresponding to the special information. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to execute the changeability effect for the subsequent increase in the special unit display even after the changeability effect is started in one game. It will be possible.

Feature B5. One of the features B2 to B4, wherein the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature B5, when the special unit display for which the changeability effect is executed is added or changed in the executable state, the newly acquired special information may correspond to the grant of the privilege. be. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect in the executable state.

Feature B6. The change condition is characterized in that the change condition is satisfied based on the newly acquired special information that the predetermined reach display is executed by the information acquisition means in the game rotation operation in the executable state. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B2 to B5.

According to the feature B6, when the special unit display for which the changeability effect is executed is added or changed in the executable state, or when the newly acquired special information becomes the start target of the game round. A given reach indication may occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect in the executable state.

Feature B7. When the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the change condition is not satisfied even if the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B6, characterized in that it is provided with a means for making the sound light side (a function of making an affirmative determination in the process of step S1415 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature B7, when the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is already stored, even if the special information is newly acquired, the target for executing the changeability effect is not added or changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution content from being changed even though the changeability effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Feature B8. When the acquired information storage means stores the special information for which a predetermined reach display is executed in the game rotation operation, the special information is newly acquired by the information acquisition means in the executable state. One of the features B2 to B7, which is characterized by having a means for preventing the change condition from being satisfied even if the change condition is made (a function of making an affirmative determination in the process of step S1415 in the sound light side MPU 82). The described gaming machine.

According to the feature B8, when the special information corresponding to the predetermined reach display is already stored, even if the special information is newly acquired, the target for executing the changeability effect is not added or changed. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution content from being changed even though the changeability effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

Feature B9. When the special unit display to be executed by the changeability effect selected by the target selection means is added or changed by the target change means, the mode change means newly performs the changeability effect. A means for changing the display mode of the special unit display to be executed to a display mode in which the expected degree is a plurality of steps higher than the previous display mode in the changeability effect once. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B8, which comprises a function of executing the processes of steps S1713 and S1906 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature B9, when the special unit display that is the target of the changeability effect is added or changed, the display mode of the special unit display that is the target of the new changeability effect is displayed. One changeability The display mode can be changed to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the previous display mode by a plurality of steps in the effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

Feature B10. When the special unit display to be executed by the changeability effect selected by the target selection means is added or changed by the target change means, the mode change means newly performs the changeability effect. The display mode of the special unit display to be executed is the same as the display mode of the other special unit display having the highest expectation in the changeability effect once. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B9, which comprises means for changing the embodiment (a function of executing the processing of step S1713 and step S1906 in the sound light side MPU 82).

According to the feature B10, when the special unit display that is the target of the changeability effect is added or changed, the display mode of the special unit display that is the target of the new changeability effect is displayed. In one changeability effect, the display mode is changed to the same as the display mode of the other special unit display, which is the display mode with the highest expectation. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the addition or change of the special unit display that is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

Feature B11. The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, and the game round operation is performed in each game round. It is equipped with a game turn control means (a function to execute an effect control process for the game turn in the sound light side MPU 82).
When a plurality of the special unit displays are displayed, the plurality of special unit displays are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction.
The effect executing means is in the direction in which the plurality of special unit displays are displayed side by side in the game times in the state where the changeability effect is executed, and the order in which the game times are started is earlier. The change suggestion image (display change suggestion image CH1) is moved and displayed from the special unit display side corresponding to the special information to the special unit display side corresponding to the special information in which the order of starting the game round is late. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A24, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the feature B11, when a plurality of special unit displays are displayed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which special unit display is the target of the execution of the changeability effect.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features B1 to B11, one or more of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (step S309 to step in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. Function to execute the processing of S311) and
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination, and the game round operation is performed in each game round. (A function to execute the effect control process for the game round in the sound light side MPU 82) and the game round control means.
Setting of the special unit display control means (holding effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the number of special unit display (holding unit image GR) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed. Function to execute processing) and
Equipped with
A plurality of types of display modes of the special unit display are set according to the expectation that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information.
This gaming machine is
In a situation where the game round is being executed, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display is changed to a display mode having a different expectation degree in a state suggesting that the predetermined special unit display is the target. A function to execute the effect execution means (function to execute the start process of the display change effect in the sound light side MPU 82) to execute the change possibility effect (display change effect) that enables the player to recognize that there is a possibility. And the function to execute the display change effect processing),
As the changeability effect, a mode changing means (sound / light side MPU 82) for making the display mode of the predetermined special unit display, which is the target of execution of the changeability effect, into a display mode having different expectations. (Functions for executing the processes of step S1710, step S1713, step S1716, and step S1721) in
Means for preventing the changeability effect from being executed when the execution period of the game times corresponds to the effect non-executable period even in the executable state in which the changeability effect can be executed (sound light side). (Function to make a negative judgment in step S1701 in MPU82) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature C1, the player recognizes the number of special information stored on hold by displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It becomes easier to do. In addition, as the display mode of the special unit display, a privilege is given by setting a plurality of types of special information corresponding to the special unit display according to the expectation that the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information. It is possible to diversify the display mode of the special unit display while relating it to the degree of expectation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special unit display.

In this case, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display is changed to a display mode having a different expectation degree while suggesting that the predetermined special unit display is targeted in the situation where the game round is being executed. A changeability effect may be performed that allows the player to recognize that there is a possibility. Then, the display mode of the predetermined special unit display suggested in the changeability effect may be actually changed to a display mode having a different degree of expectation. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that the display mode of the special unit display will be a display mode with a higher degree of expectation.

Furthermore, when the execution period of the game round is the non-executable period, the changeability effect is not executed even in the executable state. This makes it possible to execute the changeability effect while not affecting the execution period of the game times.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the effect executing means enables the changeability effect to be executed for the same special unit display in each of the plurality of game times.

According to the feature C2, since the changeability effect can be executed for the same special unit display in each of the plurality of game times, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special unit display.

Feature C3. A mode determining means for determining a reachable mode, which is a display mode corresponding to the expectation that the same special unit display can finally reach (a function of executing the processes of steps S1411 to S1413 in the sound light side MPU 82). Equipped with
The mode changing means is
Difference specifying means for specifying the difference in the number of steps regarding the degree of expectation between the current display mode and the reachable mode for the same special unit display (function of executing the process of step S1707 in the sound light side MPU 82). When,
When the difference specified by the difference specifying means is larger than the number of times of the game times executed until the special information corresponding to the same special unit display becomes the start target of the game times. Means for making the display mode of the same special unit display the reachable mode or the display mode in which the number of steps related to the expectation level approaches the reachable mode (function for executing the process of step S1713 in the sound light side MPU 82). When,
The gaming machine according to the feature C2, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature C3, the difference in the number of steps regarding the degree of expectation between the current display mode and the reachable mode for the same special unit display is the special information corresponding to the same special unit display. If the number of game rounds to be executed before the start target is larger than the number of times, the display mode of the same special unit display becomes the reachable mode, or the number of steps related to the expectation level approaches the reachable mode. It is changed to be a mode. As a result, the display mode of the same special unit display tends to be a reachable mode.

Feature C4. The mode changing means is
A mode change lottery means (in the sound light side MPU 82) for determining whether or not to change the display mode of the same special unit display by lottery in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not the reachable mode. (Function to execute the process of step S1708) and
When it is determined by the mode change lottery means to change the display mode of the same special unit display, the means for changing the display mode of the same special unit display (process of step S1710 in the sound light side MPU 82 is executed. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to the feature C3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to diversify the pattern in which the display mode of the same special unit display is changed toward the reachable mode.

Feature C5. The feature C3 or C4 is characterized in that the special information corresponding to the same special unit display can be the start target of the game round in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not the reachable mode. The gaming machine described in.

According to the feature C5, when the execution period of the game round is the non-executable period, the changeability effect is not executed even in the executable state. This makes it possible to execute the changeability effect while not affecting the execution period of the game times. Further, in a situation where the display mode of the same special unit display is not a reachable mode, the special information corresponding to the same special unit display may be the start target of the game round. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in executing the changeability effect for the same special unit display even if the reachable mode is determined in advance.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features C1 to C5, one or more of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. A pattern display means (design display device 41) that displays a variable pattern of a pattern, and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (main side MPU62) for granting a privilege (open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. (Function to execute the process of step S309 to step S311) in
The game turn control means (sound light) that displays and controls the picture display means so that the stop picture is displayed according to the mode corresponding to the result of the grant determination after the variable display of the picture is started. (Function to execute the effect control process for the game round in the side MPU 82) and
Equipped with
The game rotation control means corresponds to the acquisition correspondence information in the acquired information storage means to determine the mode of determining the stop pattern in the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. The stop symbol determination means (stop symbol determination process in the sound light side MPU 82) that can be different between the case where the special information is stored and the case where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored. A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature D1, whether the acquisition information storage means stores the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as the determination mode of the stop pattern in the game rounding effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. It will be different depending on whether or not it is. As a result, it becomes possible to display the stop pattern in a preferred mode in relation to the game situation after the privilege is given by the game rounding effect this time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The stop determination means is executing notification (display of a "rainbow-colored" hold unit image GR) that the acquired information storage means stores the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. The special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the case where the notification is not executed is determined by determining the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the case. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which is characterized in that it is different from the determined mode of the stop pattern of the gaming rotation effect triggered by the game rotation effect.

According to the feature D2, the player is convinced that the privilege will be given after the notification that the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. It is possible to play games while playing. In this case, the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information when the notification that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. The mode of determining the stop pattern of the game is different from the mode of determining the stop pattern of the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information when the notification is not executed. As a result, when the above notification is executed, it is possible to display a stop pattern in a preferred mode for the game rotation effect.

Feature D3. As the above-mentioned privilege, there are at least a first privilege (first jackpot result) and a second privilege (second jackpot result) in which the profitability of the player is higher than that of the first privilege.
The stop determination means is
A first determination means (first) for determining a first type of stop pattern (combination of the same even-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2111 and S2112 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2511 and step S2512 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2614 and step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
A second determination means (second) for determining a second type of stop pattern (combination of the same odd-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2109 and S2110 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2509 and step S2510 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2612 and step S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
In a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege is used as an opportunity. In the case of executing the game rotation effect, the processing of step S2104 and step S2105 in the sound light side MPU 82 for determining the first type of stop pattern as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect is performed. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature D1 or D2.

Special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the situation where the game rounding effect is executed after the game rounding effect in which the second type of stop pattern is displayed is executed and the second privilege is given. When the game revolving effect is executed and the first privilege is given, the player may think that the profit of the second privilege could not be sufficiently obtained. On the other hand, according to the feature D3, at least the second privilege is given in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information in the acquired information storage means. When the game rounding effect is executed triggered by the special information to be performed, the first type of stop pattern is displayed in the game rounding effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first privilege is granted by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect on the front side is executed and the second privilege is actually granted. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the profit of the second privilege could not be sufficiently obtained even if the first privilege is given by the execution of the game rotation effect on the rear side. Become.

Feature D4. When the notification that the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means (display of the hold unit image GR of "rainbow color") is executed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature D3, which is characterized by being established.

According to the feature D4, the player is convinced that the privilege will be given after the notification that the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. It is possible to play games while playing. In this case, a game triggered by at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege in the situation where the notification that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means is being executed. When the diversion effect is executed, the first type of stop pattern is displayed in the game diversion effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first privilege is granted by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect on the front side is executed and the second privilege is actually granted. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the profit of the second privilege could not be sufficiently obtained even if the first privilege is given by the execution of the game rotation effect on the rear side. Become.

Feature D5. A first starting ball entry section (first actuating device 33) and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating device 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Acceptance control means (mainly) capable of switching the second starting ball entry portion between a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or is not possible to enter, and an acceptance state in which the game ball is easier to enter. (Function to execute the process of step S214 in the side MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low frequency support mode) as a control mode (support mode) of the second start ball entry portion, and a second mode (high) in which the acceptance state is more likely to occur than the first mode. Frequency support mode) and
The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, wherein the second privilege is more advantageous than the case where the first privilege is given with respect to the control mode.

According to the feature D5, even in a situation where the game rotation effect on the front side is executed and the second privilege, which is more advantageous than the case where the first privilege is actually given with respect to the control mode, is given, the stop pattern is given. It is possible to make the player recognize that the first privilege has been granted according to the contents of the above, and even if the game rotation effect on the rear side is executed and the first privilege is granted, the profit of the second privilege is sufficiently obtained. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he could not do it.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the number of executions of the gaming rotation effect in which the second mode is maintained is larger for the second privilege than for the first privilege.

According to the feature D6, even if the number of times the game rounding effect on the front side is executed and the second mode is actually maintained is set to a relatively large number of times, the game is stopped. It is possible to make the player recognize that a relatively small number of times is set depending on the content of the pattern, and the number of times the game rounding effect is executed to maintain the second mode by executing the game rounding effect on the rear side. Even if a relatively small number of times is set, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the profit due to the relatively large number of times being set cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Feature D7. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) that can switch between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
Equipped with
When the privilege is given, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed.
The gaming machine is provided with an ending control means (a function of executing a setting process of the ending effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the ending effect is executed when the advantageous state ends.
When the first privilege is granted, the gaming situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the first gaming situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 25 times).
When the second privilege is given, the game situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the second game situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 50 times) which is more advantageous than the first game situation.
The ending control means is
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the first privilege, the first ending effect (first ending image G1) notified that the first gaming situation is reached is executed. 1 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2205 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the second privilege, the second ending effect (second ending image G2) notified that the second gaming situation is reached is executed. 2 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
When the privilege is given in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, as the ending effect of the advantageous state. , The third ending control means (step in the sound / light side MPU 82) for executing the third ending effect (third ending image G3) in which it is not notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation. Function to execute the processing of S2203) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D3 to D6.

According to the feature D7, the special information corresponding to the grant of at least the second privilege is triggered in the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the acquired information storage means. When the game turn effect is executed, not only the first type of stop pattern is displayed in the game turn effect, but also the first game situation and the first game situation and the first after the end of the advantageous state are displayed as the ending effect of the advantageous state. 2 The third ending effect is executed, in which it is not notified which of the game situations it is. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first privilege has been granted even in the situation where the game circulation effect is executed and the second privilege is actually granted. Further, in the ending effect, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above without executing the false notification that the first game situation is actually set even though the second game situation is actually set.

Feature D8. The stop determination means uses the acquired information storage means to determine the mode of determining the stop pattern of the game turn effect when the game turn effect is executed triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the special information corresponding to the stored special information is different from each other.

According to the feature D8, the mode of the stop pattern of the game rounding effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is the content of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is possible to make it a preferable embodiment for the user.

Feature D9. As the above-mentioned privilege, there are at least a first privilege (first jackpot result) and a second privilege (second jackpot result) in which the profitability of the player is higher than that of the first privilege.
The stop determination means is
A first determination means (first) for determining a first type of stop pattern (combination of the same even-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2111 and S2112 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2511 and step S2512 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2614 and step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
A second determination means (second) for determining a second type of stop pattern (combination of the same odd-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2109 and S2110 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2509 and step S2510 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2612 and step S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
In a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege in the acquired information storage means, at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege is stored. When the game rotation effect is executed as an opportunity, the means for determining the first type of stop pattern as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect (processes of steps S2607 and S2608 in the sound and light side MPU 82). Function to execute) and
In a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege in the acquired information storage means, the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege is triggered. When the game rotation effect is executed, the means for determining the second type of stop pattern as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect (processes of step S2605 and step S2606 in the sound light side MPU 82 are executed. Function to do) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to the feature D9, when the acquisition information storage means stores the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege and the game circulation effect corresponding to the grant of the privilege is executed, the first type The stop pattern of is displayed in the game rounding effect. As a result, immediately after the second type of stop pattern is displayed and the player is made to recognize the grant of the second privilege, the first type of stop pattern corresponding to the grant of the first privilege is displayed. It is possible to reduce the chances of occurrence.

In addition, when the game circulation effect corresponding to the grant of the privilege is executed in the situation where the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege is stored in the acquired information storage means, the second type of stop pattern is displayed. It is displayed in the game rounding effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the second type of stop pattern, which makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second privilege is given, is displayed.

Feature D10. As the above-mentioned privilege, there are at least a first privilege (first jackpot result) and a second privilege (second jackpot result) in which the profitability of the player is higher than that of the first privilege.
The stop determination means is
A first determination means (first) for determining a first type of stop pattern (combination of the same even-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2111 and S2112 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2511 and step S2512 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2614 and step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
A second determination means (second) for determining a second type of stop pattern (combination of the same odd-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2109 and S2110 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2509 and step S2510 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2612 and step S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
In a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege is used as an opportunity. When the game rotation effect is executed, as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect, another determination means for determining the second type of stop pattern (processes of step S2504 and step S2505 in the sound light side MPU 82) is performed. Function to execute) and
The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature D10, in the situation where the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the given of the first privilege is executed. In this case, the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game rotation effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the second type of stop pattern, which makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second privilege is given, is displayed. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature D11. When the notification that the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means (display of the hold unit image GR of "rainbow color") is executed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature D10, which is characterized by being established.

According to the feature D11, the player is convinced that the privilege will be given after the notification that the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. It is possible to play games while playing. In this case, a game triggered by at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege in the situation where the notification that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means is being executed. When the diversion effect is executed, the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game diversion effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the second type of stop pattern, which makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second privilege is given, is displayed. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature D12. A first starting ball entry section (first actuating device 33) and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating device 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Acceptance control means (mainly) capable of switching the second starting ball entry portion between a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or is not possible to enter, and an acceptance state in which the game ball is easier to enter. (Function to execute the process of step S214 in the side MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low frequency support mode) as a control mode (support mode) of the second start ball entry portion, and a second mode (high) in which the acceptance state is more likely to occur than the first mode. Frequency support mode) and
The gaming machine according to feature D10 or D11, wherein the second privilege is more advantageous than the case where the first privilege is given with respect to the control mode.

According to the feature D12, the player is made to recognize that the second privilege is given by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect is executed and the first privilege is actually given regarding the control mode. It becomes possible. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature D13. The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the number of executions of the gaming rotation effect in which the second mode is maintained is larger for the second privilege than for the first privilege.

According to the feature D13, even in a situation where a relatively small number of times is set as the number of times the game rounding effect is executed and the second mode is actually maintained, the stop pattern is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that a relatively large number of times is set depending on the content. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature D14. In the game rotation effect in which the second type of stop pattern is stopped and displayed, the game rotation effect corresponds to the granting of the privilege before the second type of stop pattern is stopped and displayed. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2410 to S2412 in the sound light side MPU 82) for executing the grant confirmation effect (normal confirmation effect) that makes the player recognizable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D10 to D13.

According to the feature D14, the configuration of the feature D10 is provided, and the chances of the second type of stop pattern being stopped and displayed in the game circulation effect are increased, so that there are many opportunities for the grant confirmation effect to be executed as a result. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D15. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) that can switch between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
Equipped with
When the privilege is given, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed.
The gaming machine is provided with an ending control means (a function of executing a setting process of the ending effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the ending effect is executed when the advantageous state ends.
When the first privilege is granted, the gaming situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the first gaming situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 25 times).
When the second privilege is given, the game situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the second game situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 50 times) which is more advantageous than the first game situation.
The ending control means is
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the first privilege, the first ending effect (first ending image G1) notified that the first gaming situation is reached is executed. 1 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2205 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the second privilege, the second ending effect (second ending image G2) notified that the second gaming situation is reached is executed. 2 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
When the privilege is given in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, as the ending effect of the advantageous state. , The third ending control means (step in the sound / light side MPU 82) for executing the third ending effect (third ending image G3) in which it is not notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation. Function to execute the processing of S2203) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D10 to D14.

According to the feature D15, in the situation where the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the given of the first privilege is executed. In that case, not only the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game rounding effect, but also as the ending effect of the advantageous state, it is notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation after the end of the advantageous state. The third ending effect that is not performed is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the second privilege is granted by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect is executed and the first privilege is actually granted. Further, in the ending effect, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above without executing the false notification that the second game situation is actually set even though the first game situation is actually set.

Feature D16. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) that can switch between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
Equipped with
When the privilege is given, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed.
The gaming machine is provided with an ending control means (a function of executing a setting process of the ending effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the ending effect is executed when the advantageous state ends.
As the privilege, the first privilege (first jackpot result) in which the gaming situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the first gaming situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 25) and the end of the advantageous state. There is at least a second privilege (second jackpot result) in which the later game situation becomes a second game situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 50 times) which is more advantageous than the first game situation. And
The ending control means is
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the first privilege, the first ending effect (first ending image G1) notified that the first gaming situation is reached is executed. 1 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2205 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the second privilege, the second ending effect (second ending image G2) notified that the second gaming situation is reached is executed. 2 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
When the privilege is given in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, as the ending effect of the advantageous state. , The third ending control means (step in the sound / light side MPU 82) for executing the third ending effect (third ending image G3) in which it is not notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation. Function to execute the processing of S2203) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15.

According to the feature D16, whether the acquisition information storage means stores the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as the determination mode of the stop pattern in the game rounding effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information. In a configuration that differs depending on whether or not, if a privilege is given in a situation where special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means, as an ending effect in an advantageous state, the first A third ending effect is executed in which it is not notified whether it is the 1st game situation or the 2nd game situation. As a result, it is possible to make not only the content of the stop pattern of the game rounding effect but also the content of the ending effect preferable.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D16, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A pattern display means (design display device 41) that displays a variable pattern of a pattern, and
Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (main side MPU62) for granting a privilege (open / close execution mode and high frequency support mode) to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. (Function to execute the process of step S309 to step S311) in
The game turn control means (sound light) that displays and controls the picture display means so that the stop picture is displayed according to the mode corresponding to the result of the grant determination after the variable display of the picture is started. (Function to execute the effect control process for the game round in the side MPU 82) and
Equipped with
As the above-mentioned privilege, there are at least a first privilege (first jackpot result) and a second privilege (second jackpot result) in which the profitability of the player is higher than that of the first privilege.
The game turn control means is
A first determination means (first) for determining a first type of stop pattern (combination of the same even-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2111 and S2112 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2511 and step S2512 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2614 and step S2615 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
A second determination means (second) for determining a second type of stop pattern (combination of the same odd-numbered symbols) as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the grant of the second privilege. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2109 and S2110 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2509 and step S2510 in the sound light side MPU 82, the fourth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2612 and step S2613 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
In a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege is used as an opportunity. When the game rotation effect is executed, as the stop pattern of the game rotation effect, another determination means for determining the second type of stop pattern (processes of step S2504 and step S2505 in the sound light side MPU 82) is performed. Function to execute) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, in the situation where the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the given of the first privilege is executed. In this case, the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game rotation effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the second type of stop pattern, which makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second privilege is given, is displayed. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature E2. When the notification that the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means (display of the hold unit image GR of "rainbow color") is executed, the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E1, which is characterized by being established.

According to the feature E2, the player is convinced that the privilege will be given after the notification that the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. It is possible to play games while playing. In this case, a game triggered by at least the special information corresponding to the grant of the first privilege in the situation where the notification that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means is being executed. When the diversion effect is executed, the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game diversion effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the second type of stop pattern, which makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second privilege is given, is displayed. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature E3. A first starting ball entry section (first actuating device 33) and a second starting ball entry section (second actuating device 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Acceptance control means (mainly) capable of switching the second starting ball entry portion between a non-acceptance state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or is not possible to enter, and an acceptance state in which the game ball is easier to enter. (Function to execute the process of step S214 in the side MPU 62) and
Equipped with
The acceptance control means has a first mode (low frequency support mode) as a control mode (support mode) of the second start ball entry portion, and a second mode (high) in which the acceptance state is more likely to occur than the first mode. Frequency support mode) and
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the second privilege is more advantageous than the case where the first privilege is given with respect to the control mode.

According to the feature E3, the player is made to recognize that the second privilege is given by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect is executed and the first privilege is actually given regarding the control mode. It becomes possible. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the number of executions of the gaming rotation effect in which the second mode is maintained is larger for the second privilege than for the first privilege.

According to the feature E4, even in a situation where a relatively small number of times is set as the number of times the game rounding effect is executed and the second mode is actually maintained, the stop pattern is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that a relatively large number of times is set depending on the content. Further, even if the second type of stop pattern that enables the player to recognize that the second privilege is granted even though the first privilege is actually granted, the privilege is displayed immediately afterwards. It is difficult to give a sense of incongruity to the player because the game rotation effect corresponding to the grant of is executed.

Feature E5. In the game rotation effect in which the second type of stop pattern is stopped and displayed, the game rotation effect corresponds to the granting of the privilege before the second type of stop pattern is stopped and displayed. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2410 to S2412 in the sound light side MPU 82) for executing the grant confirmation effect (normal confirmation effect) that makes the player recognizable. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.

According to the feature E5, with the configuration of the above feature E1, there are many chances that the second type of stop pattern is stopped and displayed in the game rounding effect, and as a result, there are many opportunities for the grant confirmation effect to be executed. It becomes possible to do.

Feature E6. Variable ball entry means (special electric winning device 32) that can switch between the open state and the closed state,
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S309 to S311 in the main MPU 62) for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable entry means is set to the open state.
Equipped with
When the privilege is given, the game state shifts to an advantageous state (open / close execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed.
The gaming machine is provided with an ending control means (a function of executing a setting process of the ending effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the ending effect is executed when the advantageous state ends.
When the first privilege is granted, the gaming situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the first gaming situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 25 times).
When the second privilege is given, the game situation after the end of the advantageous state becomes the second game situation (high frequency support mode in which the number of continuous games is 50 times) which is more advantageous than the first game situation.
The ending control means is
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the first privilege, the first ending effect (first ending image G1) notified that the first gaming situation is reached is executed. 1 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2205 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
As the ending effect in the advantageous state due to the grant of the second privilege, the second ending effect (second ending image G2) notified that the second gaming situation is reached is executed. 2 Ending control means (function to execute the process of step S2206 in the sound light side MPU 82) and
When the privilege is given in a situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information in the acquired information storage means, as the ending effect of the advantageous state. , The third ending control means (step in the sound / light side MPU 82) for executing the third ending effect (third ending image G3) in which it is not notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation. Function to execute the processing of S2203) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to the feature E6, in the situation where the special information corresponding to the given corresponding information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the game circulation effect triggered by the special information corresponding to the given of the first privilege is executed. In that case, not only the second type of stop pattern is displayed in the game rounding effect, but also as the ending effect of the advantageous state, it is notified whether it is the first game situation or the second game situation after the end of the advantageous state. The third ending effect that is not performed is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the second privilege is granted by the content of the stop pattern even in the situation where the game rotation effect is executed and the first privilege is actually granted. Further, in the ending effect, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above without executing the false notification that the second game situation is actually set even though the first game situation is actually set.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E6, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Information acquisition means (a function to execute the acquisition process of reserved information in the main MPU 62) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding area 103) that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. Grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S703 in the main MPU 62) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
A privilege granting means (step S309 to step in the main MPU 62) for granting a privilege (opening / closing execution mode) to the player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination. Function to execute the processing of S311) and
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated in a state where the operation result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is notified, which is regarded as one game round, and the game round is used in each game round. A game turn control means (a function of executing an effect control process for a game turn in the sound light side MPU 82) that enables the operation to be performed, and
Setting of the special unit display control means (holding effect in the sound light side MPU 82) so that the number of special unit display (holding unit image GR) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is performed. Function to execute processing) and
In a situation where the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the said special information corresponding to the special information before the game round triggered by the special information is started. A specific display control means (first) in which the display mode of the special unit display is set to a specific display mode so that the player can recognize that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information. In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2006 and S2007 in the sound light side MPU 82, and in the third embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2406 and step S2407 in the sound light side MPU 82).
Equipped with
In the situation where the special unit display in the specific display mode exists, the special information that triggered the start of the game round is used as the start trigger before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege can be granted as a result of the gaming times.

According to the feature F1, the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed by the player by displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It will be easier to recognize. Further, when the acquired information storage means stores the special information corresponding to the assigned corresponding information, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information may be the specific display mode. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player recognize in advance that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information exists, and it is possible to suitably raise the expectation of the player. Further, by performing such advance notification using the special unit display, it is possible to make the player recognize at which timing the privilege is given.

In this case, in the situation where the special unit display in the specific display mode exists, the special information that triggered the start of the game is used as the start trigger before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. Benefits can be granted as a result of game rounds. As a result, it becomes possible to cause an event in which the privilege is given in the game times executed before the game times recognized by the player when the privilege is given, which gives the player unexpectedness. It becomes possible. In addition, in a situation where the player is aware that the privilege will be granted in the future, the additional privilege will be granted before the grant of the privilege, and it will be possible to give the player a great sense of satisfaction.

Feature F2. In a situation where the acquired information storage means stores a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information, the specific display control means has a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information. Of these, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the rear side in the order that triggers the start of the game round is the specific display mode, and the order that triggers the start of the game round is the special information on the front side. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the above is not the specific display mode.

According to the feature F2, when the effect of setting the display mode of the special unit display as the specific display mode is executed in the situation where a plurality of special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored, among the plurality of special information. The display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the rear side is the display mode that triggers the start of the game round, while the special unit display that corresponds to the special information on the front side is the display mode that triggers the start of the game round. The display mode of is not a specific display mode. As a result, in a situation where a special unit display having a specific display mode exists, the game is triggered by the special information that triggered the start of the game before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. As a result of the times, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the benefits to be granted.

Feature F3. In a situation where the acquired information storage means stores a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information, the specific display control means has a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to one of the special information is the specific display mode.

According to the feature F3, when the effect of setting the display mode of the special unit display as the specific display mode is executed in the situation where a plurality of special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored, among the plurality of special information. The display mode of the special unit display corresponding to one special information is the specific display mode. As a result, in a situation where a special unit display having a specific display mode exists, the game is triggered by the special information that triggered the start of the game before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. As a result of the times, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the benefits to be granted. In addition, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the display mode of the special unit display becomes the specific display mode, and it is possible to make the player recognize that it is valuable that the display mode of the special unit display becomes the specific display mode. It becomes.

Features F4. In a situation where the acquired information storage means stores a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information, the specific display control means has a plurality of the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information. Of these, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information in the order of the latest start trigger of the game round is defined as the specific display mode, and the special unit corresponding to the special information other than the special information is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the display mode of the display is not the specific display mode.

According to the feature F4, when the effect of setting the display mode of the special unit display as the specific display mode is executed in the situation where a plurality of special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored, among the plurality of special information. The display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information in the order in which the order that triggers the start of the game round is the latest is the specific display mode. As a result, in a situation where a special unit display having a specific display mode exists, the game is triggered by the special information that triggered the start of the game before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. As a result of the times, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the benefits to be granted. In addition, in a situation where there is a special unit display that is a specific display mode, the game times triggered by the special information that triggered the start of the game times before the special information corresponding to the special unit display. As a result of the above, it is possible to create a situation in which the event in which the privilege is granted repeatedly occurs.

Feature F5. It is executed with the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as an opportunity in a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied by storing the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the acquisition information storage means. In the game rounding operation, the player can recognize that the game rounding operation corresponds to the granting of the privilege before the operation result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is notified. Means for performing a predetermined final effect (continuous villa final effect) (a function of executing the process of step S2008 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment, step S2408 in the sound light side MPU 82 in the third embodiment). It has a function to execute the processing of
The specific display control means has one of the features F1 to F4 characterized in that the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information is the specific display mode when the predetermined definite effect is performed. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature F5, the game rotation operation corresponds to the granting of the privilege before the operation result of the game rotation operation is notified by executing the predetermined definite effect in the game rotation operation. Can be recognized by the player. Then, when the predetermined definite effect is executed, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information which is the special information stored in the acquired information storage means at that time is specified and displayed. It becomes an aspect. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the predetermined final effect is executed.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the grant determination means sequentially performs the grant determination on a plurality of the special information according to the order acquired by the information acquisition means.

According to the feature F6, it is possible to exert the excellent effect as already described in the configuration in which the special information triggers the start of the game round according to the acquired order.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F6, any one or a plurality of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D16, features E1 to E6, and features F1 to F6 are configured. May be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of gaming machine. It is known that these gaming machines perform an internal lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common to have an effect for making the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, for pachinko machines, a lottery is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry section provided in the game area, and a variable display of a pattern is performed on the display surface of the display device, and the lottery is performed. When the winning result is obtained, the combination of specific patterns and the like is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and it is known that the player shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Then, when the state shifts to the special gaming state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... pachinko machine, 32 ... special electric winning device, 33 ... first actuating device, 34 ... second actuating device, 41 ... symbol display device, 62 ... main side MPU, 82 ... sound light side MPU, 103 ... holding area, CH1 ... Display change suggestion image, G1 ... 1st ending image, G2 ... 2nd ending image, G3 ... 3rd ending image, GR ... Hold unit image.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry means ,
An acquisition information storage means that stores special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers, and an acquisition information storage means.
A grant determination is performed to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, and when a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means, the plurality of special information are subjected to the determination. The grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination and
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is specified in the grant determination.
The game round operation is started, and the game round operation is terminated in a state where the operation result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is notified, which is regarded as one game round, and the game round is used in each game round. A game time control means that allows the movement to be performed, and
A special unit display control means for displaying the number of special units corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, and a special unit display control means.
In a situation where the special information corresponding to the given correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the said special information corresponding to the special information before the game round triggered by the special information is started. A specific display control means in which the display mode of the special unit display is a specific display mode so that the player can recognize that the special information corresponding to the special unit display corresponds to the grant correspondence information.
After the privilege is granted, the probability of granting the privilege is set to a higher probability state than in the case of the low probability state, and the specified number of game times after the privilege is granted is in the high probability state. The means to get it done,
Equipped with
In the specific display control means, a plurality of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is stored in the acquired information storage means in a situation where the special unit display in the specific display mode does not exist. In such a situation, the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the front side in the order of starting the game round among the plurality of the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is specified. A means is provided for making the display mode of the special unit display corresponding to the special information on the rear side in the order of starting the game round as the specific display mode, while not using the display mode .
As the starting ball entering means, a predetermined starting ball entering means provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state is provided.
The gaming machine includes a switching control means for switching and controlling the predetermined starting and entering means between the open state and the closed state.
The switching control means has a first mode and a second mode in which the open state is more likely to occur than the first mode as the control mode of the predetermined start / entry means.
This gaming machine is
The privilege depends on whether the special information that triggered the grant of the privilege is the first grant correspondence information in the grant correspondence information or the special information is the second grant correspondence information in the grant correspondence information. The means for differentiating the number of times of the game in which the second mode is maintained after being granted
When the grant of the privilege is completed and the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not stored in the acquired information storage means, the second mode is maintained after the privilege is granted. A means for controlling so that a predetermined notification corresponding to the number of times of the game is executed, and
When the granting of the privilege is completed and the special information corresponding to the granting information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the means for controlling the predetermined notification is not executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with .

Images